JVC SR HD1250US User Manual

BLU-RAY DISC & HDD RECORDER  
INSTRUCTIONS  
(A)  
SR-HD1500US  
SR-HD1250US  
HDD  
REC  
BD  
REC  
SD  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
STANDBY/ON  
RESET  
HDD  
BD/SD  
STOP  
REV  
PLAY  
FWD  
PAUSE  
REC  
HDV/DV IN  
For Customer Use:  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial  
No. which are located on the rear of  
cabinet. Retain this information for  
future reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
.
LST1083-001C  
Safety Precaution  
CAUTION:  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
Declaration of Conformity  
4) Follow all instructions.  
Model Number:  
Trade Name:  
SR-HD1500US  
JVC  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
Responsible Party: JVC Americas Corp.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with  
the manufacturer’s instructions.  
Address:  
1700 Valley Road Wayne, N.J. 07470  
Telephone Number: 973-317-5000  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-  
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than  
the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are  
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into  
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the  
obsolete outlet.  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the apparatus.  
11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use  
caution when moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury from tip-  
over.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning  
storms or when unused for long periods  
of time.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is  
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,  
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been  
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus  
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
When the equipment is installed in a cabinet or a shelf, make sure  
that it has sufficient space on all sides to allow for ventilation  
(10 cm or more on both sides, on top and at the rear).  
Failure to heed the following precautions may result in  
damage to the unit, remote control or disc/cassette.  
1. DO NOT place the unit ^  
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and the local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
^ in an environment prone to extreme temperatures or  
humidity.  
Use the supplied power cord.  
(If not, fire or electric shock may be caused.)  
^ in direct sunlight.  
DON'T continue to operate the equipment if you are in any doubt  
about it working normally, or if it is damaged in any way -- switch  
off, withdraw the mains plug and consult your dealer.  
DO be careful with glass panels or doors on equipment.  
DO consult you dealer if you are ever in doubt about the  
installation, operation or safety of your equipment.  
NEVER let anyone especially children push anything into holes,  
slots or any other opening in the case -- this could result in a fatal  
electrical shock.  
^ in a dusty environment.  
^ in an environment where strong magnetic fields are  
generated.  
^ on a surface that is unstable or subject to vibration.  
2. DO NOT block the unit’s ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper  
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
3. DO NOT place heavy objects on the unit or remote control.  
4. DO NOT place anything which might spill on top of the unit  
or remote control.  
MOISTURE CONDENSATION  
(If water or liquid is allowed to enter this equipment, fire or  
electric shock may be caused.)  
Moisture in the air will condense on the unit when you move it from  
a cold place to a warm place, or under extremely humid  
conditions^just as water droplets form on the surface of a glass  
filled with cold liquid. In conditions where condensation may occur,  
disconnect the unit’s power plug from the wall and keep it  
disconnected for a few hours to let the moisture dry, then turn on  
the unit.  
5. DO NOT expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing.  
6. DO NOT use this equipment in a bathroom or places with  
water. Also DO NOT place any containers filled with water or  
liquids (such as cosmetics or medicines, flower vases, potted  
plants, cups, etc.) on top of this unit.  
7. DO NOT place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
8. AVOID violent shocks to the unit during transport.  
.
3
Safety Precaution  
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY  
JVC shall not be liable for any loss relating to the unit’s failure to  
properly record, store or playback any content (video, audio or  
otherwise) for any reason whatsoever. Any applicable warranties  
shall only cover replacement or repair of the effected unit, and shall  
not apply to recovery or replacement of lost content.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and  
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;  
7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered  
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD  
Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-  
2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
ATTENTION:  
Using a mobile phone in the vicinity of the unit may cause  
picture vibration on the TV screen or change the screen to a  
black back display.  
Some TVs or other appliances generate strong magnetic  
fields. Do not place such appliances on top of the unit as it  
may cause picture disturbance.  
When moving the product, press A to turn off the power,  
and wait at least 30 seconds before unplugging the power  
cord. Then, wait at least 2 minutes before moving the  
product.  
If there is a power outage when using the unit, the recorded  
data may be erased.  
It is recommended to back up discs which contain important  
recordings periodically (every few years). As digital signals  
do not deteriorate, failure to play back or record might arise  
due to the effects of the disc aging through the years  
depending on the storage environment.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by  
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing  
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
DVD logo is a registered trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Recorded programs and data cannot be restored once the  
disc or tape is damaged.  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC.  
“Blu-ray Disc” and the “Blu-ray” logo are trademarks.  
“x.v.Color” and the “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation Co., Ltd.  
This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals.  
The hard disk is a consumable item. Replacement is  
recommended after 10000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C  
environment). For information on maintenance planning and  
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United  
States and other countries.  
The fan motor is a consumable item. Replacement is  
recommended after 30000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C  
environment). For information on maintenance planning and  
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
SDHC logo is trademark.  
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic  
Corporation and Sony Corporation.  
Other product and company names included in this instruction  
manual are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their  
respective holders.  
If this symbol is shown, it is only valid in the European  
Union.  
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license  
and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-  
commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance  
with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”)  
and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a  
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity  
and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide  
AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any  
other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG  
LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.  
HOW TO USE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
All major sections and subsections are listed in the Table Of  
Contents on page 5. Use this when searching for information on  
a specific procedure or feature.  
The A mark signals a reference to another page for instructions  
or related information.  
Operation buttons necessary for the various procedures are  
clearly indicated through the use of illustrations at the beginning  
of each major section.  
Batteries -- Incorrect use of batteries may cause the batteries  
to burst or ignite. A leaky battery may corrode the equipment,  
dirty your hands or spoil your clothing. In order to avoid these  
problems, make sure to observe the precautions below:  
Use the specified batteries only.  
BEFORE YOU INSTALL YOUR NEW UNIT . . .  
. . . please read the sections/literature listed below.  
Cautions” on page 2  
Install the batteries with due attention to the plus (+) and  
minus (-) sides of the batteries according to the instructions in  
the compartment.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” on page 3 to 4  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
Do not mix batteries of different types. Voltage specifications  
of batteries of the same shape may vary.  
Replace an exhausted battery with a new one promptly.  
If you will not use the remote control for a long time, remove  
the batteries.  
If leaked battery fluid gets on your skin or clothing, rinse  
immediately and thoroughly. If it gets into you eye, bathe your  
eye well rather than rubbing and seek medical treatment  
immediately. Leaked battery fluid that gets into your eye or  
your clothing may cause a skin irritation or damage your eye.  
Do not put the batteries in a place where young children can reach.  
.
4
Contents  
Playing Still Images (JPEG) ............................................ 55  
Changing Playback Settings ........................................... 56  
Playback Settings Menu .................................................. 56  
Audio/subtitle settings .................................................. 56  
Playback settings ......................................................... 56  
Video settings .............................................................. 57  
Contents  
Safety Precaution  
Contents  
Editing  
Getting Started  
Editing ............................................................................. 58  
Entering Characters ........................................................ 59  
Character List .............................................................. 59  
Grouping .......................................................................... 60  
Changing the Title/Group Name ...................................... 62  
Deleting a Title/Group ..................................................... 62  
Turning On Title/Group Protection .................................. 63  
Turning Off Title/Group Protection .................................. 64  
Creating a Playlist ........................................................... 65  
Editing a Thumbnail ......................................................... 66  
Editing a Chapter ............................................................. 67  
Dividing ............................................................................ 69  
Delete Scenes ................................................................. 70  
Changing the Disc Name ................................................ 72  
Changing the Shooting Date/Time .................................. 72  
Mode conversion ............................................................. 73  
Key Features ..................................................................... 6  
How to Read this Manual .................................................. 6  
Other Precautionary Notes ................................................ 7  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ...................................................... 8  
SD Cards ........................................................................... 8  
Discs .................................................................................. 9  
Precautions on the Use of Discs ..................................... 11  
On-screen Displays ......................................................... 12  
Name and Function of Parts ............................................ 13  
Front panel ................................................................... 13  
Display window ............................................................ 14  
Rear panel ................................................................... 14  
Remote control ............................................................ 15  
Preparation  
Connecting a Monitor ...................................................... 17  
Connecting a Video Deck or Other Equipment ............... 18  
Connecting an Amplifier .................................................. 18  
Connecting External Devices .......................................... 19  
Connecting the Power Supply ......................................... 19  
Setting and Displaying Date/Time ................................... 20  
Settings Menu  
Changing Settings of this Unit ......................................... 74  
Setting Menu List ............................................................. 74  
Setup ........................................................................... 75  
Playback Setting .......................................................... 76  
Record ......................................................................... 77  
Audio ............................................................................ 78  
Display ......................................................................... 79  
Connection ................................................................... 80  
Dubbing/Importing  
Dubbing/Importing ........................................................... 23  
Dubbing chart .............................................................. 24  
Formatting ....................................................................... 25  
Recording Modes ............................................................ 28  
Importing Data to the HDD Using the ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING Button ......................................................... 29  
Importing Data from a BD/DVD to the HDD .................... 30  
Importing Data from a USB-compatible Device to the HDD  
...................................................................................... 33  
Importing Data from an SD Card to the HDD .................. 35  
Importing Data from an i.LINK-compatible Device to the  
HDD ............................................................................. 37  
Dubbing a Title from the HDD to a BD/DVD .................... 39  
Dubbing Still Images from the HDD ................................ 42  
Enabling Playback on Other Devices (Finalizing) ............ 44  
Copying the Entire Disc ................................................... 46  
Recording Using External Inputs ..................................... 47  
Others  
Locking the Disc Tray ...................................................... 82  
Turning on the Mode Lock ............................................... 82  
Last Function Memory ..................................................... 82  
RS-232C Interface (only for SR-HD1500) ....................... 83  
Command Table .......................................................... 83  
Specifications ............................................................... 83  
Command .................................................................... 84  
Language Code List ........................................................ 94  
Country Code List ............................................................ 96  
Using the HDMI Consumer Electronics Control (HDMI  
CEC) ............................................................................ 98  
Creating a Seamless BD ................................................. 98  
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 99  
Specifications ................................................................ 101  
Index .............................................................................. 102  
Playing Back  
About Playing Back ......................................................... 48  
Using Playback Navigation .............................................. 48  
Option menu list ........................................................... 50  
Video Playback Operation ............................................... 51  
Playing Videos on a BD/DVD .......................................... 53  
Playing Videos on the HDD ............................................. 54  
Playing Videos on a SD Card .......................................... 54  
5
Getting Started  
Key Features  
How to Read this Manual  
Professional Blu-ray Disc recorder of the  
high-definition era  
Copy videos to a Blu-ray Disc in high-definition from a high-  
definition camcorder, or down convert the videos and record  
them onto DVDs, all without the need for a PC.  
The internal hard disk drive enables for easy editing and  
dubbing multiple discs.  
About this manual  
This manual mainly describes operation procedures using the  
remote control unit buttons.  
v
The buttons on the remote control unit are indicated as  
[Button Name].  
v
The menu items are indicated as “Menu Item”.  
m
Supplementary remarks in the main text  
Compatible with ProHD Camcorder GY-  
HM700/100 (only for SR-HD1500)  
MOV files that are taken in SP mode (*1) using the JVC  
ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100 are compatible with the  
SR-HD1500, and can be imported into the HDD or dubbed  
onto discs.  
Memo : States restrictions on the functions or use of this unit.  
Note : States precautions to be taken during operation.  
A
: Indicates the page numbers or items to refer to.  
Memo:  
The displays of operable media are highlighted.  
(*1) SP mode : 1280x720/60p, 30p, 24p, 1440x1080/60i  
HDD : Hard disk  
DVD : DVD  
Compatibility with other consumer  
camcorders  
In addition to AVCHD, HDV and DV, JVC Everio file formats  
are also compatible, and digital dubbing can be done.  
BD  
SD  
: Blu-ray disc  
: SD card  
SDHC : SDHC Card  
CD  
: Music compact disc  
JPEG : JPEG (still picture) file disc  
Digital interface that allows for camcorder  
compatibility  
This unit is equipped with USB, SD slots and i.Link input  
terminals for connecting the camcorder.  
The unit illustrations used in this manual are from the SR-  
HD1500.  
Refer to the supplied CD-ROM for the Spain and French  
GUIDEBOOK.  
In order to view the GUIDEBOOK, AdobeT AcrobatT  
ReaderE or AdobeT ReaderT must be installed.  
AdobeT ReaderT can be loaded from Adobe’s  
web site:http://www.adobe.com/  
Create menu-supported Blu-ray discs  
Blu-ray discs can be created using the BDMV (with menu)  
format. BDAV discs can also be created and dubbed  
according to the intended use.  
The SR-HD1500 also enable users to use an original image  
as the background.  
Menu operation  
Pressing the remote control buttons below calls up the  
respective menu screens.  
Compatible with dual layer 50 GB Blu-ray  
discs, and records up to 24 hours of full  
high-definition images in a single disc  
v
[SET UP], [NAVIGATION], [EDIT], [INFORMATION  
This unit is also compatible with high capacity dual layer 50  
GB Blu-ray discs, and up to 24 hours (AE mode) of full high-  
definition images can be recorded in a single disc.  
CORRECT], [DUBBING], [MEDIA MANAGE]  
v
Press any of the [ J / K / H / I ] buttons to move to a  
Writing to inexpensive LTH discs is also supported.  
specific menu item (yellow item indicated by a small arrow).  
v
Press the [OK] button to confirm the selection.  
v
Press the [RETURN] button to return to the previous screen.  
Authoring menu enables discs to be  
created and used industrially such as for  
demonstrations  
v
Simple instructions on the operation procedure may be  
displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
Disc authoring can be used to create discs for industrial use,  
such as discs that repeat playback automatically.  
Equipped with external control RS-232C  
terminal (only for SR-HD1500)  
This unit is equipped with a RS-232C terminal that allows for  
external control using a PC.  
6
Getting Started  
Disclaimer of compensation for loss or  
Other Precautionary Notes  
damage of stored video content  
Please note that our company will not be liable for compensation  
of the content or any incidental damages in the event that  
dubbing or playback cannot be performed properly for some  
reasons. The same applies during repair of this unit.  
Copyright protection  
This unit supports copyright protection technologies.  
Copyrights  
According to the copyright law, video or music data that you  
store must not be used for purposes other than personal  
enjoyment without the authorization of the copyright holder.  
Handling precautions  
v
m
Do not use the plug or power point with dust  
or metallic objects attached to it  
v
Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and  
v
This product employs the CPRM technology, and is protected  
result in fire or electric shock.  
by the proprietary technologies as well as intellectual property  
rights of the United States and Japan.  
v
Remove the plug once every half a year, and clean it with a  
Use of the CPRM technology is subject to the approval of  
Macrovision Solutions Corporation. Unless special  
authorization is obtained from Macrovision Solutions  
Corporation, the CPRM is restricted to household and some  
pay-per-view uses. Do not dismantle or remodel this product.  
The copyright protection function prevents copyrighted video  
images from being saved to equipment such as a video  
recorder. This function may also cause deterioration in the  
playback picture quality when the data is output to a monitor  
through a video recorder. This is not a hardware malfunction.  
To play back copyrighted videos, connect this product directly  
to the monitor.  
dry cloth.  
m
Make use of a power point that allows the  
power plug to be inserted or removed easily  
Make sure that the plug can be removed immediately in  
case an abnormality is found in the unit.  
v
m
Insert the plug firmly into the power point  
Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and  
result in fire or electric shock.  
v
m
Do not make use of a power voltage other  
than that specified  
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.  
v
Read and understand fully the terms and conditions of all  
v
copyright works before using this unit in the correct  
manner. Under no circumstances shall JVC take any  
responsibility for any infringements of copyright caused by  
the customer when using this unit. The customer shall be  
responsible for resolving all legal issues regarding to any  
copyright infringements.  
m
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet  
hands  
Doing so may result in electric shock.  
v
m
Do not touch the plug when there is thunder  
or lightning  
Doing so may cause electric shock.  
Stored video content and compensation  
For discs containing important video content, backup on a  
periodic basis (once every few years) is recommended.  
Although digital signals do not deteriorate, playback or  
dubbing may fail due to aging of the disc resulting from the  
storage conditions.  
v
v
m
Do not insert any foreign object into this unit  
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.  
v
m
Do not dismantle or remodel this unit  
This unit consists of high-voltage components. Dismantling  
or remodeling the unit may cause fire or electric shock.  
v
v
Recorded data may be lost if power outage occurs while  
this unit is being used. It is therefore recommended that  
videos stored on the HDD be dubbed to a BD or DVD as  
soon as possible in case the HDD breaks down.  
m
Request the authorized dealer to inspect the  
interior part of the unit once a year  
Using this unit with dust accumulated inside may result in fire.  
v
Videos or data stored on a BD/DVD, HDD, or SD card  
cannot be recovered if the media is damaged.  
v
v
It is particularly effective to perform servicing before the  
humid rainy season.  
m
Do not connect any video cameras that are  
not made by JVC to the USB terminal  
v
Doing so may result in malfunction.  
7
Getting Started  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  
SD Cards  
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
The HDD rotates at a high speed whenever the power is  
turned “On”.  
Pay particular attention to the following precautions when  
using this unit.  
Precautions for handling SD and SDHC  
cards  
Note:  
v
The disc operation display icon appears blinking and  
“READING” is displayed on the display window when the SD  
card is being accessed (such as during dubbing, playback, or  
formatting). When access to the SD card is in progress, do not  
remove the card or the power plug. Doing so may cause the  
SD card to become unusable.  
Warning  
v
Do not subject it to vibration or strong impact  
Subjecting this unit to excessive impact may result in loss of  
recorded data and even damage of the HDD.  
If the SD card is not usable, reformat the card. If the problem  
persists even after reformatting, use a new SD card.  
v
Do not remove the power plug when this unit is running  
v
Do not use or store the card at a place that is subject to static  
Shutting down the power when the HDD is running may result  
in data loss and even damage of the HDD. Make sure that the  
power plug is removed only after turning off the power.  
(Wait for the “GOODBYE” message on the display window to  
disappear first)  
or electrical noise.  
v
Inserting the SD card incorrectly may cause this unit or the  
card to malfunction.  
v
Our company will not be liable for any damage or loss of the  
stored data due to accidents. (Be sure to back up the data.)  
v
Use the card according to the prescribed conditions. Do not  
use it at the following locations.  
v
Places that are exposed to direct sunlight  
v
Places near heat-generating equipment  
v
Inside a car that is under the sun with the windows tightly  
shut  
v
Places that are subject to high humidity and corrosion  
v
Do not bend or drop the card, or subject it to strong impact  
or vibration.  
v
Do not expose the card to water.  
v
Do not place near devices that emit strong magnetic or  
radio waves.  
v
Do not touch the metal part of the card.  
Memo:  
v
To dispose a card after erasing all data inside, it is  
recommended that this be done using a commercially  
available data deletion software, or by destroying the card  
physically, such as with a hammer. Formatting or deletion  
of data using this unit only changes the file administration  
information, and does not erase the data completely.  
BD video data  
You can erase BD Video data from the SD card as follows.  
1
Insert the SD card which has BD video data  
stored on it, into the [SD SLOT]  
Memo:  
v
The BD video data cannot be erased if the SD card is write-  
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before  
inserting the SD card.  
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
3
Select “BD-VIDEO DATA ERASE” from “SD  
CARD”  
The confirmation screen for erasing the BD video data is  
displayed.  
v
4
Select “ERASE”, and press the [OK] button  
The BD video data will be erased.  
v
8
Getting Started  
m
When using DVD-RW discs  
Discs  
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.  
v
Format using “VR MODE” or “VIDEO MODE”.  
BD recording formats  
m
BDAV mode  
Videos can be edited (chapter edit etc) and new videos can  
v
be added to the disk. This format is suitable for recording  
videos.  
v
MPEG2 with HD quality will be recorded as it is onto the  
disc. This format has low playback compatibility, but  
performs well when used for backups.  
m
BDMV mode  
Compatible and playable on other BD players. Menu  
v
functions similar to those of DVD video mode are also  
included.  
This format performs well for distribution purposes.  
DVD recording formats  
m
VR MODE  
v
Format the disc using “VR MODE” if you want to add new  
videos to the disc.  
v
Deleting currently saved videos increases the remaining  
space on the disc. (except for the case of DVD-R discs.)  
m
VIDEO MODE  
Format the disc in this mode if you want to play the disc on  
v
a different DVD player.  
Formatting of discs  
Formatting is required for some disc types. Perform  
formatting if this is necessary.  
m
When using BD-RE or BD-R discs  
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.  
m
When using DVD-R discs  
Formatting is required depending on the disc mode to be used.  
v
Formatting is required when the disc is used in “VR MODE”  
. Format the disc using this unit.  
v
Formatting is not required when using the disc in “VIDEO  
MODE”.  
Note:  
v
BD-R and DVD-R discs cannot be reformatted. Check the  
disc mode before formatting the disc.  
9
Getting Started  
Discs (Continued)  
Discs that enable both dubbing and  
playback  
Disc Type  
Recording Format  
Format  
Finalize  
Repeated Use  
(Reformat)  
BD-RE  
BDAV mode  
V
V
V
V
V
V
-
-
V
V
-
BDMV mode  
BDAV mode  
BDMV mode  
Video mode  
VR mode  
-
BD-R  
V
-
-
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
V
V
V
V
V
V
-
Video mode  
VR mode  
V
-
Discs that enable playback only  
Disc Type  
Description  
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB)  
BD-ROM  
Supports specific forms of playback, but no recording can be done.  
Commercially available Blu-ray discs (movies, music, etc.)  
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “A”.  
DVD video  
Music CD  
Commercially available DVD-Video discs (movies, music, etc.)  
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “1”. The video format used is NTSC.  
CD-DA  
DTS music CDs are also playable.  
Memo:  
v
If 8 cm discs are used, only playback can be performed. The disc cannot be used for recording or editing.  
8 cm discs can be used without adapters.  
v
v
DVD-RAM cartridges and BD-RE are not supported. Take the DVD-RAM out of the cartridge before using it.  
Discs that are not supported  
v
DVD-RAM (2.6 GB/5.2 GB)  
v
DVD-R (for authoring)  
v
CD-ROM/R/RW (PhotoCD, CD-G, VCD etc.)  
v
DDCD (1.3 GB, Double Density CD)  
v
HDCD (High Density CD)  
Memo:  
v
To playback a BD or DVD that was created using this unit on another player, finalize the disc.  
v
There is no need for finalizing if the BD-RE disc is recorded using BDAV mode.  
v
If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode compatible  
devices.  
v
To perform high-speed dubbing, make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.  
v
This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals.  
Note:  
v
Do not use disc if the sticker or label is peeled off from the disc surface, if the disc is not round in shape, or if it is significantly  
warped or cracked.  
10  
Getting Started  
Disc storage  
Avoid storing the disc at the following locations.  
Precautions on the Use of  
Discs  
v
v
Places that are subject to high humidity, dust, or mold  
growth  
v
Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or near a  
Maintenance of discs  
Dirt attached to the disc, such as fingerprints and dust, may  
cause distortion in the video image or sound.  
Keep the disc clean at all times such as by using a soft  
cloth.  
heater  
v
v
Inside a car during summer  
v
v
v
Do not drop the disc or subject it to strong impact.  
Place the disc in a case and store it vertically.  
Stacking the discs without using a case, placing the discs  
against one another or dropping them may result in  
deformation or cracking.  
v
Wipe the disc lightly from the center outward using the  
cloth.  
v
If dirt is stubborn, wipe it off using a slightly wet cloth,  
followed by a dry cloth.  
v
Do not use thinner, benzine, alcohol, conventional record  
cleaners, or antistatic sprays.  
Doing so may damage the disc surface.  
When the recording/playback lens is dirty  
Dust or dirt may be attached to the recording/playback lens  
after using this unit for a prolonged period of time, and  
recording or playback may not be properly performed as a  
result.  
Although the performance of this unit varies according to the  
frequency of use and installation environment, it is  
recommended that cleaning of the lens be performed once  
every half a year using commercially available DVD lens  
cleaners.  
Handling discs  
m
Removing a disc  
For cleaning procedures, refer to the instruction manual of the  
lens cleaner.  
.
Precautions when playing a dual disc  
The side of the dual disc that is not used for DVD recording  
does not comply with the standard specifications of music  
CDs.  
m
Keeping a disc  
It is recommended that playback on this unit be limited to the  
DVD recording side of the dual disc.  
Use genuine JVC discs  
.
The best performance may not be obtained for some discs.  
It is recommended that genuine JVC discs be used to ensure  
the best results.  
m
Correct way to hold a disc  
Power Cable  
Do not unplug the cable during recording or playback.  
Doing so may cause the disc to become unusable.  
If the disc becomes unusable, refer to the following.  
.
v
Make sure that your hands do not touch the recording/  
playback side of the disc.  
BD-R or : Use a new disc.  
DVD-R  
BD-RE or : Reformat the disc after erasing the data. If the  
DVD-RW  
disc is still not usable, use a new disc.  
Do not turn off the [A] button or unplug the power cable  
immediately after closing the disc tray.  
11  
Getting Started  
On-screen Displays  
Status display  
Displays the current settings and operating status (such as  
playback, pause) of this unit.  
Pressing the [ON SCREEN] button on the remote control  
displays the status. To cancel the display, press the [ON  
SCREEN] button again.  
You can select whether to display the statuses by changing  
the settings in the settings menu.  
For more details, refer to “Display” (A page 79) .  
Memo:  
v
To display the statuses, set the ON SCREEN GUIDE item  
on the DISPLAY menu screen to “AUTO”.  
v
Setting the DISPLAY item to “OFF” hides display of all  
status information.  
Event display  
An on-screen event display appears on the display window as  
well as the monitor when there is a misoperation.  
v
The event display appears for an interval of about three  
seconds.  
Memo:  
v
The same event display may appear several times.  
Alarm display  
When an operation is not accepted by this unit, an on-screen  
alarm display appears on the display of the main unit as well  
as the monitor.  
12  
Getting Started  
Name and Function of  
Parts  
Front panel  
A
B
C
D
E FG H I J K L M  
N
O
P
Q
R
.
A [ A ] button  
Turn On/Off the power.  
N Playback control buttons  
v
[ I ] button  
Plays back the data.  
B Disc tray  
C [ M ] button  
v
[ o ] button  
Stops playback/recording.  
Opens/closes the disc tray.  
v
[ O ] button  
D Display window  
E Remote control sensor  
Fast reverses playback.  
v
[ N ] button  
F [RESET] switch  
Reset the unit.  
Fast forwards playback.  
v
[ W ] button  
G [REC MODE] button  
Pauses playback.  
Switches the recording mode.  
O [ R ] button  
Starts recording of a title.  
H [HDD] lamp  
Lights up when in HDD mode.  
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/importing.  
P [SD SLOT]  
Used for inserting SD cards.  
I [INPUT SELECT] button  
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L1).  
Q [i.LINK(HDV/DV IN)] terminal  
Connect a video camera using i.LINK (HDV/DV. IN).  
J [BD] lamp  
R [USB] terminal  
Connect a video camera using USB.  
Lights up when in BD/DVD mode.  
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/dubbing.  
K [MEDIA SELECT] button  
Switches between HDD and BD/SD.  
L [SD] lamp  
Lights up when in SD mode.  
M [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button  
Starts dubbing at a single touch.  
13  
Getting Started  
Name and Function of  
Parts (Continued)  
Display window  
A
B
C
D
.
English messages appear for a number of operations.  
(Examples)  
A HDD/DISC remaining level display  
B Dubbing display  
HELLO  
: When the power plug is inserted  
: When reading the disc  
C Disc status display  
READING  
D HDMI output display  
ONSCREEN : Upon moving to the playback navigation  
screen  
Memo:  
v
The brightness of the display window can be adjusted.  
For more details, refer to “PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS”  
(A page 75) .  
Rear panel  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
.
F [SERIAL COM.(RS-232C)] terminal  
(only for SR-HD1500)  
A AC inlet  
For connecting the power supply.  
For connecting to a computer using a serial cable.  
B Cooling fan  
G [HDMI] terminal  
For connecting using an HDMI cable.  
C [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)] terminal  
For connecting to the amplifier using an optical audio cable.  
H [S-VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals  
For connecting using an S-video cable.  
D [AUDIO OUT/IN] terminals  
For connecting using an audio cable.  
I [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals  
For connecting using a component video cable.  
E [VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals  
For connecting using a video cable.  
J [REMOTE IN] terminal  
For connecting a wired remote control.  
14  
Getting Started  
I [ J / K / H / I ]  
The cursor can be moved to select an item.  
Remote control  
J [OPTION]  
Displays the option screen.  
A
T
V
K [ S ]  
B
C
U
W
Move to the chapter just before the current chapter.  
L [ O ]  
Fast reverses the video and starts slow playback.  
M [ R ]  
D
Press the [ R ] and [ I ] buttons together to start recording.  
X
N [REC MODE]  
For checking the recording mode settings and amount of time  
remaining.  
Y
E
Z
b
F
G
a
c
O [ON SCREEN]  
Displays information on the screen.  
H
I
P [PROGRESSIVE SCAN]  
d
f
Switches the resolution of the image output.  
J
e
g
Q [AUDIO]  
Switches the playback audio.  
K
L
M
R [EDIT]  
Displays the editing menu screen.  
h
j
i
k
S [MEDIA MANAGE]  
Displays the media management menu screen.  
N
O
l
n
p
P
Q
T [ A ]  
m
o
For turning On/Off the power.  
R
U [INPUT SELECT]  
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L1).  
S
V [BD/SD]  
For operating BD/DVD or SD.  
.
W [PAGE PRV][PAGE NEXT]  
Returns to the previous page. Or advances to the next page.  
A [DELETE]  
X [ w ]  
Deletes a title or characters.  
Move the playback position slightly backwards.  
B [ M ]  
Opens/closes the disc tray.  
Y [ v ]  
Advance the playback position slightly.  
C [HDD]  
For operating the HDD.  
Z [#]  
For entering characters.  
D [1]-[9]  
For entering characters.  
a [YELLOW]  
Enabled when the color button (yellow) is displayed.  
E [Z]  
For entering characters.  
b [BLUE]  
Enabled when the color button (blue) is displayed.  
F [RED]  
c [NAVIGATION]  
Displays the playback navigation screen.  
Enabled when the color button (red) is displayed.  
G [GREEN]  
Enabled when the color button (green) is displayed.  
d [OK]  
Confirms a selection or entry.  
H [DUBBING]  
Displays the dubbing menu screen.  
e [RETURN]  
Returns to the previous screen without applying the selection  
or entry.  
f [ T ]  
Move to the next chapter.  
15  
Getting Started  
Remote control codes  
Name and Function of  
Parts (Continued)  
By setting a remote control code for the unit and remote  
control, you can prevent two recorders from operating  
simultaneously using the remote control for this unit.  
(the setting for the unit and remote control at time of purchase  
is “REMOTE CONTROL 3”.)  
g [ N ]  
Fast forwards the video and starts slow playback.  
h [ I ]  
Plays the video.  
Memo:  
v
Changing the remote control code for the remote control  
before the unit’s remote control code is changed will cause  
the unit to be inoperable.  
Change the unit’s remote control code first when changing  
remote control codes.  
i [ W ]  
Pauses the video that is currently playing.  
j [ o ]  
Stops playback/recording.  
m
Changing the remote control code for the  
unit  
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
to display the “SETUP” menu  
k [MARK]  
Adds a chapter mark during playback or recording. Select  
multiple titles from the playback navigation screen or other  
screens.  
1
2
Change the “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” option  
in the “SETUP” menu  
l [PB MODE]  
Display the playback settings screen.  
Memo:  
m [ANGLE]  
Switches the camera angle for playback.  
v
For more details, refer to “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” (A  
page 75) .  
n [SET UP]  
m
Changing the remote control code for the  
remote control  
Press and hold the [OPTION] button on the  
remote control  
Displays the settings menu screen.  
o [SUB TITLE]  
Switches the playback subtitle.  
1
p [INFORMATION CORRECT]  
Displays the information editing screen.  
2
Press either of the [1], [2], [3] or [4] buttons  
Press the number button that is equivalent to the remote  
control code you desire.  
v
Change batteries for the remote control  
If the operable distance of the remote control unit becomes  
3
Press the [OK] button  
Press the [OK] button to change the remote control code.  
v
v
shorter, this means that the batteries are running out.  
When this occurs, replace the batteries with new ones.  
4
Release the [OPTION] button on the remote  
control  
Memo:  
v
If the remote control code is different from the unit, the  
remote control code for the unit will be displayed on the  
display window.  
Examples: REMOTE CONTROL 3  
.
Batteries  
v
Insert the batteries correctly according to the + and - signs.  
Insert the - side of the battery first.  
v
If an error occurs while using the remote control unit,  
remove the batteries, wait for about five minutes, and  
operate the remote control unit again after re-inserting the  
batteries.  
Battery life : Approximately 6 months  
(depending on the frequency of use)  
16  
Preparation  
Memo:  
Connecting a Monitor  
v
After connecting a component video cable, change the unit  
setting to “COMPONENT OUTPUT”.  
To display video images from this unit, connect it to a monitor.  
For more details, refer to “COMPONENT OUTPUT” (A page  
81) .  
v
This unit supports connections using “HDMI cable”,  
“component video cable”, “S-video cable”, or “video cable”.  
Memo:  
v
Switch to the appropriate monitor input according to the  
Connecting using an S-video cable  
Connecting using an S-video cable (sold separately) delivers  
video images that are clearer than those by a video cable.  
type of connection cable used.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the monitor.  
Connecting using a HDMI cable  
Connecting using a HDMI cable (sold separately) enables  
signals to be maintained in the digital format, and thus  
playback of clear video images.  
.
Connecting using a video cable  
Connect the output terminal of this unit to the input terminal of  
a TV using the supplied video/audio cable.  
(Use the supplied BNC adapter)  
.
Memo:  
v
Videos cannot be displayed on a monitor that does not  
support the copyright protection system (HDCP).  
v
Use a High Speed HDMI Cable.  
v
After connecting using a HDMI cable, change the unit  
setting to “HDMI CONNECTION”.  
For more details, refer to “ VIDEO PRIORITY MODE ” (A  
page 80) .  
.
Connecting using a component video cable  
Connecting using a component video cable (sold separately)  
delivers playback images that are clearer than those by an S-  
video cable.  
Note:  
v
Connect the S-video/video output of this unit directly to the  
TV (or monitor). Connecting this unit to the TV or monitor  
via a video deck triggers the copy protection function, and  
may cause distortion in the video images during playback.  
.
17  
Preparation  
Connecting a Video Deck  
or Other Equipment  
Connecting an Amplifier  
Connecting an audio amplifier  
m
Connecting using an optical digital cable  
Connecting a video camera  
m
Connecting via the i.LINK terminal  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
STANDBY/ON  
RESET  
BD/SD  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
REC  
HDV/DV IN  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
BD/SD  
HDV/DV IN  
.
.
Memo:  
v
Remove the protection cap of the cable before connecting.  
m
Connecting via the USB terminal  
Store the protection cap properly to prevent it from being  
misplaced.  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
STANDBY/ON  
RESET  
HDD  
BD/SD  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
REC  
HDV/DV IN  
m
Connecting using an audio cable  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
BD/SD  
HDV/DV IN  
.
Memo:  
v
Some video camera models may require an AC adapter  
instead of batteries to run. For details, refer to the video  
camera’s instruction manual.  
.
Connecting a video deck or other  
equipment (recording using this unit)  
.
Memo:  
v
When connecting using an S-video cable, change the  
setting of “VIDEO INPUT SETTING” to “S-VIDEO”.  
For more details, refer to  
“VIDEO INPUT SETTING” (A page 81) .  
v
To record video images played back on this unit to an  
external device (video deck, etc.), connect the output  
terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the external  
device.  
18  
Preparation  
Connecting External  
Devices  
Connecting the Power  
Supply  
Connect the supplied power cable to this unit as follows.  
Connecting a wired remote control  
.
.
1
2
Connect the supplied power cable to the AC IN  
terminal of this unit  
Using a wired connection enables stable control of this unit  
from an external device.  
Operation is possible using any code (1 to 4) regardless of  
the remote control code settings of this unit.  
Connect the other end of the power cable to a  
power point  
3
Press the [A] button on the remote control or  
this unit to switch on the unit.  
The power of this unit turns on, and a “HELLO” message  
appears on the display window.  
Memo:  
v
v
There is currently no compatible remote control unit  
available.  
v
To create a wired remote controller, refer to “RS-232C  
Note:  
v
Interface” (A page 83) .  
Do not use power cables other than that supplied with this  
unit. Doing so may cause this unit to malfunction.  
Connecting using a RS-232C cable (only  
for SR-HD1500)  
.
External operation is enabled by connecting a RS-232C cable  
to a PC or similar device.  
For details on external operation, refer to “RS-232C Interface”  
(A page 83) .  
19  
Preparation  
4
Select “CLOCK SET”, and press the [OK] button  
The Clock Set menu screen appears.  
Setting and Displaying  
Date/Time  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows. The  
recording date/time is stored on the disc.  
v
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
Setting the date/time  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows.  
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control unit  
The Settings menu screen appears.  
v
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
.
5'672  
5
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
Set the time and date  
Repeat the steps below to specify the time and date.  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
v
Press the [ J ] or [ K ] button, select the Clock Set  
item, and press the [OK] button.  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢃꢃꢄ  
,#0ꢁꢃꢅ  
#/ꢅꢂꢆꢃꢃ  
2
3
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
[OK] button  
“CLOCK SET/DISPLAY” menu screen appears.  
'06'4  
v
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
5'672  
Press the [ J ] or [ K ] button, change the setting  
value, and press the [OK] button.  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
5'672  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢃꢅꢅꢆ  
ꢃꢅꢅꢆ  
,#0ꢁꢅꢂ  
#/ꢂꢃꢄꢅꢅ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
'06'4  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
20  
Preparation  
6
3
After setting is complete, select “ENTER”, and  
press the [OK] button  
Doing so exits date/time setting, and returns to the initial  
screen.  
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
[OK] button  
v
v
The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.  
5'672  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
1((  
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢃꢃꢄ  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
,#0ꢁꢃꢅ  
#/ꢅꢂꢆꢃꢃ  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
'06'4  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
.
5'672  
4'6740  
.
4
Select “DATE DISPLAY”, and press the [OK]  
button  
The Date Display menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
v
The value for seconds cannot be set. After setting the  
minute, press the [SET UP] button according to the time  
signal.  
v
v
v
To cancel date/time setting, press the [RETURN] button.  
Doing so cancels date/time setting and returns to the initial  
screen.  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
The year can be set from 2009 to 2037.  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
If "2037.12.31 PM11:59" is set, the time will change to  
"2009.1.1 AM00:00" after one minute.  
Changing the date display style  
You can specify the display style of the date as follows.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
.
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
5
Select the date display style.  
2
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
The Settings menu screen appears.  
v
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
;'#4ꢄ/106*ꢄ&#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
&#;ꢄ/106*ꢄ;'#4  
5'672  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
ꢂꢃ*  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
v
4'6740  
Select a date display style from the following items.  
.
YEAR.MONTH.DAY : Displays the date in the year/month/  
day order.  
MONTH.DAY.YEAR : Displays the date in the month/day/  
year order.  
DAY.MONTH.YEAR : Displays the date in the day/month/  
year order.  
6
After selecting, press the [OK] button  
The date display style will be saved.  
v
21  
Preparation  
4
5
Select “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE”, and press the  
[OK] button  
Setting and Displaying  
Date/Time (Continued)  
Memo:  
The Time Display menu screen appears  
v
The date display style will be applied in the following  
5'672  
information displays.  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
v
Recording date of the title that is shown in the playback  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
navigation screen (The recording date will be shown in  
place of the title if the title has not been input).  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
v
Shooting date and time that is shown when AVCHD is  
played back  
v
Date that is displayed in the title information display  
screen  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
.
Changing the time display style  
You can specify the display style of the time as follows.  
6
Select the time display style  
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
5'672  
2
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
The Settings menu screen appears.  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
v
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
ꢂꢃ*  
ꢃꢅ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
1((  
5'672  
4'6740  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
.
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
Select from “12H” or “24H”.  
12H: Displays the time in AM/PM format.  
24H: Displays the time in 24-hour format.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
7
After selecting, press the [OK] button  
The time display style will be saved.  
v
3
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
[OK] button  
The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
v
The time display style applies to the following.  
v
v
v
v
Current time  
Date/time registered on the disc  
Recording time of the title that is shown in the playback  
navigation screen  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
(The recording time will be shown in place of the title if  
the title has not been input.)  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
v
v
1((  
Shooting date and time that is displayed when AVCHD is  
played back  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
Time of recording that is displayed in the title information  
display screen  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
22  
Dubbing/Importing  
m
Importing data from a SDHC/SD to the HDD  
Dubbing/Importing  
Bi-directional dubbing between the HDD and a BD/DVD is  
possible using this unit alone. Also, data can be imported to  
the HDD from a video camera by connecting it via i.LINK or  
USB.  
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to the  
HDD by inserting the SDHC/SD card that the videos are  
saved on.  
m
Importing data from a video camera to the  
HDD  
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to the  
HDD.  
This unit supports video camera connections via i.LINK and  
USB.  
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD  
m
High-speed dubbing  
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the time  
required for dubbing. Make use of a BD/DVD disc that  
supports high-speed recording.  
Memo:  
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in MOV format (SP  
mode) taken using JVC ProHD camcorder GY-HM700/100  
are compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos  
taken on devices by other company.  
In addition, MOV videos cannot be imported using the SR-  
HD1250.  
m
Dubbing in a specific recording mode  
Select this option when you want to specify the recording  
mode for dubbing. Dubbing can be performed in the recording  
mode of your preference, such as whether to “maintain a high  
picture quality” or “save as many titles as possible”.  
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
HDD  
DR  
Video Camera  
Memo:  
USB/SDHC/SD  
MOV*  
v
The image quality will not improve even when a recording  
Deterioration-free  
dubbing  
DR  
(MOV*)  
mode with image quality higher than that of the original  
recording mode is chosen.  
Encode dubbing  
SD-VIDEO(HD)*  
DR  
v
Dubbing using a specific recording mode will cause the disc  
to be re-encoded.  
HDV/DV  
HDV  
AF/AN/AL/AE  
AVCHD  
Other options for importing data into the  
HDD  
SD-VIDEO(SD)*  
AVC  
FR  
DV  
m
Importing data from a BD/DVD to the HDD  
You can import titles from a BD/DVD.  
L1 terminal  
VIDEO/  
XP/SP/LP/EP  
JPEG  
BD/DVD  
S-VIDEO  
HDD  
DR  
BD  
JPEG  
BDMV  
.
BDAV  
AF/AN/AL/AE  
MOV*  
: MOV files that are taken in SP mode using  
the JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-  
HM700/100  
DVD  
EverioBackup *  
AVC  
FR  
SD-VIDEO(HD)*: SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)  
SD-VIDEO(SD)* : SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 PS)  
AVCHD  
DVD-VR  
m
Importing data from a video deck  
You can import data to the HDD from an external video deck  
by connecting it to a composite video or S input terminal.  
For more details, refer to “Recording Using External Inputs”  
(A page 47) .  
XP/SP/LP/EP  
JPEG  
DVD-Video *  
Deterioration-free  
dubbing  
EverioBackup  
(JPEG)  
Encode dubbing  
Memo:  
BD  
v
Videos that are copy-controlled cannot be imported.  
BDAV  
(BD-RE, JPEG)  
v
Motion JPEG is not supported  
.
DVD-video*  
: Discs that are not finalized cannot be  
imported.  
EverioBackup* : Data disc containing high-definition videos  
that are recorded in the MPEG2 format  
using a DVD writer for Everio.  
23  
Dubbing/Importing  
Dubbing chart  
m
Dubbing the video data from the HDD  
.
Dubbing  
Quality  
Format (BD)  
Format (DVD)  
Content  
Quality  
BDMV(HD Quality) BDAV(HD Quality) BDAV(SD Quality)  
DVD-VR  
DVD-VIDEO  
DR (MOV*)  
DR (Other)  
AF/AN/AL/AE  
AVC  
High-speed dubbing High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
-
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
FR  
-
-
-
-
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
XP/SP/LP/EP*  
High-speed dubbing / High-speed dubbing /  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Memo:  
EP*  
: High-speed dubbing to DVD-VIDEO format discs in EP mode title  
To perform high-speed dubbing of a EP mode title to a DVD-VIDEO format disc, set “ HIGH-SPEED DUBBING ” (A  
page 77) in the settings menu to “4:3” before recording or importing. Only re-encoding will be performed when  
dubbing a title that is recorded or imported with a setting other than “4:3”.  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
m
Dubbing the picture data from the HDD  
Importing file  
(HDD)  
Media  
BDAV(BD-RE) SDHC/SD  
JPEG  
V
V
Memo:  
v
Video images may be distorted in the following situations during reencoding/dubbing when the monitor (TV) is connected to  
this unit using a HDMI cable, or when the screen resolution is set to 1080p.  
v
Proceeding with dubbing from the menu screen  
v
Returning to the normal screen after dubbing has finished  
v
This is not a malfunction. Change the screen resolution to a setting other than 1080p if you feel that this is annoying.  
24  
Dubbing/Importing  
Formatting a disc  
Formatting  
1
Set the DVD or BD to be formatted on the disc  
tray  
Unused discs or SD cards may require formatting in some  
cases.  
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
The Media Management menu screen appears.  
When the need arises, format the disc or SD card  
accordingly.  
v
Memo:  
v
Formatting a disc or SD card erases all existing data from  
the media.  
Double-check carefully before formatting so as not to erase  
important titles.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
v
When using a DVD-R disc in the Video mode, formatting is  
not required.  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
(14/#6  
Format chart  
Refer to the following chart for the disc types and format  
when formatting a disc.  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
Note:  
.
v
If a disc is formatted using an equipment not manufactured  
by JVC, the disc may not be read correctly even though it  
corresponds to the chart below.  
In this case, reformat the disc using this unit, or make use  
of another blank disc.  
3
Select “FORMAT” from “BD/DVD”  
DVD : A format selection screen appears.  
BD  
: A confirmation screen to execute formatting  
appears.  
Memo:  
v
BD-R and DVD-R discs can only be formatted once.  
4
Select a format mode from the format selection  
screen  
v
When a disc is re-formatted into another format, remove  
the disc and load it again.  
m
DVD format chart  
Format  
VR  
Video  
Format  
Format  
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&  
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ(14/#6ꢀ/1&'  
DVD-RW Single-sided, single  
layer (4.7 GB)  
V
V
V
V
84ꢀ/1&'  
8+&'1ꢀ/1&'  
DVD-R  
Single-sided, single  
layer (4.7 GB)  
V(*)  
V (*)  
Single-sided, dual layer  
(8.5 GB)  
.
V: Format supported.  
DVD-RW : Select a “Format mode” from “VR MODE” or  
“VIDEO MODE”.  
* : Formatting not required.  
Memo:  
m
BD format chart  
v
This screen does not appear when a BD or DVD-R disc is  
Format  
used.  
BD-RE Single-sided, single layer (25 GB)  
Single-sided, dual layer (50 GB)  
V
V
V
V
BD-R  
Single-sided, single layer (25 GB)  
Single-sided, dual layer (50 GB)  
V: Format supported.  
25  
Dubbing/Importing  
m
Cancel formatting  
Press the [OPTION] button while formatting  
Formatting (Continued)  
1
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button in the  
format confirmation screen  
126+105  
$#%-  
5612  
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ+0ꢀ:::  
#..ꢀ4'%14&'&ꢀ6+6.'5ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&  
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ;;;ꢀ/+076'5  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(14/#6!  
;'5  
01  
(14/#6  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ':+6ꢃ(41/ꢃ6*'ꢃ126+10ꢃ5%4''0  
.
.
2
Select “STOP” and press the [OK] button  
v
A confirmation screen to stop formatting appears.  
v
v
Formatting starts.  
3
Select “YES” on the confirmation screen and  
press the [OK] button  
After formatting is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the  
normal screen is displayed.  
%10(+4/  
(14/#66+0)ꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ56122'&  
5612!  
%10(+4/  
;'5  
01  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(14/#66'&  
1-  
(14/#6  
ꢀꢀꢁ  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ':+6ꢂ(41/ꢂ6*'ꢂ126+10ꢂ5%4''0  
.
.
v
Formatting is stopped.  
Note:  
Memo:  
v
v
Formatting can be stopped if it seems to take a long time  
(more than two minutes).  
To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,  
select “DO NOT FORMAT” and press the [OK] button.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return  
to the initial screen without formatting.  
v
If for any reason formatting cannot be stopped, the  
confirmation screen for stopping formatting will not appear  
even if the [OPTION] button is pressed.  
Note:  
v
Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when  
the “FORMATTING DISC…” message is displayed.  
v
Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles  
erases all the titles from the disc.  
26  
Dubbing/Importing  
4
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
Formatting an SD Card  
1
Insert the SD card to be formatted into the [SD  
SLOT]  
With the terminal side facing down, insert the SD card until  
a “click” sound is heard.  
v
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ%#4&̉5ꢀ%106'06ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&ꢀꢁ  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ56#46ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ!  
;'5  
01  
.
.
v
v
Formatting starts.  
Note:  
After formatting is complete, a “THE SD CARD HAS BEEN  
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the  
normal screen is displayed.  
v
Formatting cannot be performed if the SD card is write-  
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before  
inserting the SD card.  
Memo:  
v
2
To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,  
select “NO” and press the [OK] button.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return  
to the initial screen without formatting.  
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
The Media Management menu screen appears.  
v
Note:  
v
Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when  
the “FORMATTING SD CARD…” message is displayed. Do  
not remove the SD card as well. Doing so may damage the  
SD card.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
v
v
Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles  
erases all the titles from the disc.  
(14/#6  
Once the formatting of the SD card begins, it cannot be  
stopped.  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
.
3
Select “FORMAT” from “SD CARD”  
A confirmation screen to execute formatting appears.  
v
27  
Dubbing/Importing  
Recording Modes  
Maximum recording time for each recording mode  
You can specify a recording mode according to the intended use. Setting the video to a high picture quality shortens the  
maximum recording time, while setting to a lower picture quality lengthens the recording time.  
Refer to the following table for the maximum recording time in the respective modes. All figures shown in the table are  
approximate values.  
Recording  
Mode  
Quality  
BD (Single-  
sided, Single  
Layer)  
BD (Single-  
sided, Dual  
Layer)  
DVD (Single-  
sided, Single  
Layer)  
DVD (Single-  
sided, Dual  
Layer)  
HDD (500 GB)  
(*1)  
DR  
AF  
AN  
AL  
AE  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
HD  
-
-
-
-
40 hours (*2)  
80 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
-
-
6 hours  
12 hours  
18 hours  
24 hours  
10.5 hours  
21 hours  
42 hours  
84 hours  
-
-
126 hours  
189 hours  
252 hours  
110 hours  
222 hours  
442 hours  
887 hours  
9 hours  
-
-
12 hours  
5.25 hours  
10.5 hours  
21 hours  
42 hours  
-
-
SD  
1 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
1.7 hours  
3.5 hours  
7.1 hours  
14.3 hours  
*1 : If the HDD capacity is 250 GB (SR-HD1250US model) the time will be approximately half of what is stated here.  
*2 : An estimated figure when HDV is imported.  
Memo:  
v
DR mode  
Abbreviation for Direct Recording. Videos are recorded in the original picture quality.  
v
AF/AN/XP/SP mode  
Recommended for recording images with fast motion, such as sports videos.  
v
The AF/AN mode record images at the high-quality HD level.  
v
The XP/SP modes record images at the high-quality SD level.  
v
AL/AE/LP mode  
Recommended for recording images with slow motion and little contrast, such as dramas.  
v
AL/AE mode records images at the low-quality HD level.  
v
LP mode records images at the low-quality SD level.  
v
EP mode  
Recommended for recording images with sharp outlines, such as animation videos, and when the recordable time (remaining  
time) is limited.  
HD picture quality  
Using BD enables dubbing to be done with HD picture  
quality. To dub HD picture quality titles that are imported in  
the HDD, use BD.  
FR mode  
v
FR mode is displayed as the recording mode in the following  
cases.  
v
FR mode during import into HDD  
Note:  
During import of SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 PS) titles  
via high-speed dubbing. During import of data via high-  
speed dubbing from DVD-VR discs recorded using other  
units.  
v
Dubbing to a DVD cannot be done in HD picture quality.  
DR mode  
v
FR mode during dubbing from HDD  
When selecting the most appropriate mode automatically  
between XP and EP according to the remaining memory on  
the disc.  
v
HDV, MOV* and SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS) titles  
are imported using DR mode.  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the JVC  
ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
28  
Dubbing/Importing  
i.LINK device : “HDV/DV RDY”  
Importing Data to the HDD  
Using the ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING Button  
Titles can be imported to the HDD from an SD card or device  
connected to the USB or i.LINK terminal simply by pressing  
the [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button.  
USB device  
SD card  
: “USB RDY”  
: “SD RDY”  
2
Press the [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button on the  
unit  
One-touch importing starts.  
v
v
File formats that can be imported  
USB connection device, SD card  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS), MOV*,  
and JPEG  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the  
JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
.
i.LINK-connected device  
DV and HDV content  
Memo:  
Memo:  
v
Refer to the following for the flow of operations by the  
system of this unit.  
v
Data is searched according to the order of priority listed  
below when multiple devices are connected to this unit.  
USB h SD card h i.LINK  
Data is retrieved only from the first device and imported to  
the HDD. Connect only the device that contains data you  
want to import to the HDD.  
3
System checks the device connection  
v
The system of this unit detects the connected device.  
Search for devices is performed in the sequence of USB,  
SD card, followed by i.LINK.  
The i.LINK connected device can only be used to import  
from tape media.  
4
System detects the titles to import  
All titles that can be imported will be detected and imported.  
v
v
All video files (scenes) imported using “ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING” are combined into one title.  
This unit does not support combining of titles during the  
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and  
import data, select “ONE TOUCH DUBBING”.  
5
6
Importing of titles by this unit starts  
After titles are successfully imported, a  
“DUBBING IS COMPLETED” message appears  
on the monitor  
v
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
v
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM700/100  
SP mode 1080i (25 Mbps) requires a duration that is about  
1.3 times longer than the usual time.  
%10(+4/  
v
When importing DV contents with shooting date/time  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
information, the date/time information at the beginning of  
the contents will be taken as the shooting date/time  
information. For HDV contents or DV contents without  
shooting date/time information, the importing date/time will  
be taken as the shooting date/time information.  
1-  
Note:  
v
.
Do not unplug the cable while importing to the HDD is in progress.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
Memo:  
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in MOV format (SP  
v
The following buttons are enabled when importing is in  
progress.  
[ A ]  
mode) taken using JVC ProHD camcorder GY-HM700/100  
are compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos  
taken on devices by other company.  
In addition, MOV videos cannot be imported using the SR-  
HD1250.  
: Continues importing while switching this  
unit to the Standby mode.  
[ONE TOUCH : Press this button for three seconds or  
v
DUBBING]  
longer to cancel importing.  
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
v
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a long  
time depending on the amount of files in the device or media.  
[OPTION]  
: Displays a pop-up menu for canceling  
importing.  
[ON SCREEN] : Pressing this button each time displays or  
hides the importing information.  
m
Procedure for one-touch importing  
1
Connect the device to be used. Alternatively,  
insert an SD card.  
Once preparations for importing have been done, the  
Note:  
v
Importing stops and a message appears on the monitor if  
an error occurs during the importing process.  
v
message below will be shown on this unit’s display window.  
29  
Dubbing/Importing  
Full import  
Importing Data from a BD/  
DVD to the HDD  
1
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
v
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
Data can be imported from a BD/DVD to the HDD as follows.  
v
File formats that can be imported  
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
BD-MV, BD-AV, AVCHD, DVD-VR, DVD-VIDEO,  
EverioBackup, and JPEG  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Memo:  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
v
Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
into one title.  
&+5%  
*&&  
This unit does not support combining of titles during the  
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and  
import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
v
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
v
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
Note:  
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
v
“START” will appear instead of “NEXT” in the menu if the  
disc is of a format other than “BD-AV”. In this case, go to  
Step 5.  
v
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a  
long time depending on the amount of files in the device.  
m
3
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
A pop-up menu appears.  
Preparations  
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
1
2
v
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The importing screen appears.  
4
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option  
v
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&7$$+0)  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
.
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
3
Select “DISChHDD” in the importing screen, and  
press the [OK] button  
v
A check mark is added to the “DISChHDD” item.  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The import selection screen appears.  
v
Memo:  
v
A recording mode selection appears instead of the import  
selection screen when DVD-VIDEO is detected.  
For more details, refer to “Importing DVD-VIDEO” (A page  
32) .  
30  
Dubbing/Importing  
3
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
A pop-up menu appears.  
5
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing of the titles starts.  
v
v
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
%10(+4/  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
.
4
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.  
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
Specify a title  
5
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
v
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
6
Create an import title list  
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
v
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
v
2
Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
Memo:  
&+5%  
*&&  
v
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
the title.  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
v
Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]  
button to perform the following changes.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
v
':+6  
Delete the selected title from the list  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
Thumbnails may not be displayed during title selection  
depending on the discs used.  
v
v
If a “BD-AV” disc is set, a recording mode selection screen  
will appear.  
If the disc is of a format other than “BD-AV”, a screen for  
creating an import title list will appear. Go to step 5.  
31  
Dubbing/Importing  
1
Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]  
button, and select “RECORDING MODE” from  
the recording mode selection screen  
Importing Data from a BD/  
DVD to the HDD  
v
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.  
(Continued)  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
7
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
2.'#5'ꢂ%4'#6'ꢂ#ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ+/2146  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
1-  
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing of the titles starts.  
v
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
created title list.  
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
%10(+4/  
1-  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
.
.
Memo:  
v
If the first play setting of the DVD-video has been set to top  
Note:  
menu or other settings, the title will not playback.  
If playback does not start, press the play button or playback  
the DVD-Video.  
v
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
v
v
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
HDD memory is insufficient  
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
Canceling importing  
v
A dubbing title list has not been created  
m
To cancel importing before it starts  
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
v
button to cancel importing of a title.  
Importing DVD-VIDEO  
When DVD-VIDEO is detected, a recording mode selection  
screen appears.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
m
Follow the steps below to import DVD-VIDEO to the HDD.  
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
Press the [OPTION] button to display the pop-up menu.  
v
Select “CANCEL” from the pop-up menu and press the  
[OK] button. Data will be written onto the disc up to the  
point where import is cancelled.  
v
Importing will also be stopped when the [o] button is  
pressed to stop playback.  
32  
Dubbing/Importing  
m
Preparations  
Connect the USB device (Everio, etc.) to this unit  
using a USB cable  
Importing Data from a USB-  
compatible Device to the  
HDD  
1
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
STANDBY/ON  
RESET  
HDD  
BD/SD  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
REC  
HDV/DV IN  
Data on devices connected to the USB terminal can be  
imported to the HDD as follows.  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
BD/SD  
v
File formats that can be imported  
HDV/DV IN  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS), MOV*,  
and JPEG  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the  
JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
Memo:  
.
v
Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles  
during the editing operation after import is complete. To  
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
Memo:  
v
After connecting the USB cable, turn on the camera and  
switch the mode of the camera.  
(Choose "Connect to a computer" or a similar option. For  
v
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
details refer to the camera’s instruction manual.)  
“USB RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when  
an USB device is recognized.  
v
v
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The importing screen appears.  
v
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM700/100  
SP mode 1080i (25 Mbps) requires a duration that is about  
1.3 times longer than the usual time.  
v
Note:  
v
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device if  
an USB compatible device is to be connected to this unit.  
Do not unplug the USB cable while importing a title.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
For MOV format videos, only videos in MOV format (SP  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
v
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
v
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
v
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
mode) taken using JVC ProHD camcorder GY-HM700/100  
are compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos  
taken on devices by other company.  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
In addition, MOV videos cannot be imported using the SR-  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
HD1250.  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a  
long time depending on the amount of files in the USB  
3
Select “USBhHDD” in the importing screen, and  
press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “USBhHDD” item.  
device.  
v
If a USB connection is used, this unit will only recognize one  
v
device out of all the recording devices.  
Depending on the video camera, the memory card slot will be  
recognized but the internal device will not be recognized.  
Use the following methods to solve this.  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The import selection screen appears.  
v
v
If the internal device is not recognized:  
Copy the data from the camera’s internal memory or  
HDD onto the SD card.  
Full import  
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
v
If using a JVC camcorder that has two memory card  
1
slots:  
Put the memory card that has the required data in slot A.  
v
v
If the target device is not recognized using the USB  
connection, use the camcorder's burner or a similar device  
to dub the disc before proceeding with dubbing on this unit.  
For more details, refer to “Importing Data from a BD/DVD to  
the HDD” (A page 30) .  
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
v
When importing videos from a USB-connected camcorder,  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
data reading from the internal memory of the camcorder  
may fail. If both the camcorder’s internal memory and SD  
card are available, the SD card may be detected first. To  
prevent this from occurring, remove the SD card before  
reading data from the internal memory.  
75$  
*&&  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
33  
Dubbing/Importing  
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing Data from a USB-  
compatible Device to the  
HDD (Continued)  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146  
75$  
*&&  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ  
v
Importing of the titles starts.  
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
%10(+4/  
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
created title list.  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
.
Specify a title  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
1-  
v
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
.
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
Note:  
v
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
75$  
*&&  
v
v
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
HDD memory is insufficient  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
v
A dubbing title list has not been created  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
Canceling importing  
v
A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
m
To cancel importing before it starts  
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
3
Create an import title list  
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
v
v
button to cancel importing of a title.  
v
Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
m
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
v
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
Memo:  
v
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside the  
title.  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
v
v
You can perform the following editing operations by selecting a  
title from the dubbing title list and pressing the [OK] button.  
Delete the selected title from the list  
v
Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.  
34  
Dubbing/Importing  
3
Select “SDhHDD” in the importing screen, and  
Importing Data from an SD  
Card to the HDD  
press the [OK] button  
v
A check mark is added to the “SDhHDD” item.  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The import selection screen appears.  
Data can be imported from a SD (SDHC) card to the HDD as follows.  
v
v
File formats that can be imported  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS), MOV*,  
and JPEG  
Full import  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the  
JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
1
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
Memo:  
v
v
Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles  
during the editing operation after import is complete. To  
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
v
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
v
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
5&  
*&&  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM700/100  
v
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
SP mode 1080i (25 Mbps) requires a duration that is about  
1.3 times longer than the usual time.  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
Note:  
v
Do not remove the SD card when importing of the titles is in  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
progress or when the importing screen is displayed.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in MOV format (SP  
mode) taken using JVC ProHD camcorder GY-HM700/100  
are compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos  
taken on devices by other company. In addition, MOV  
videos cannot be imported using the SR-HD1250.  
v
v
Importing of the titles starts.  
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
m
Preparations  
1
Insert the SD (SDHC) card into the [SD SLOT]  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
.
.
Memo:  
v
Memo:  
“SD RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when  
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
to return to the previous screen.  
an SD card is recognized.  
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The importing screen appears.  
v
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
35  
Dubbing/Importing  
Importing Data from an SD  
Card to the HDD  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146  
5&  
*&&  
(Continued)  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ  
Specify a title  
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
v
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
created title list.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
5&  
*&&  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
%10(+4/  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
1-  
v
A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
3
Create an import title list  
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
v
.
Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
Memo:  
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
to return to the previous screen.  
Note:  
Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
v
Memo:  
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
v
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
the title.  
v
HDD memory is insufficient  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
v
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
v
You can perform the following editing operations by  
selecting a title from the dubbing title list and pressing the  
[OK] button.  
v
A dubbing title list has not been created  
v
Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.  
v
Delete the selected title from the list  
v
When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-  
VIDEO, MOV*) in the SD card, press the [RED] button to  
select the format you want to display.  
Canceling importing  
m
To cancel importing before it starts  
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
MOV*: MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the JVC  
ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
v
button to cancel importing of a title.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
m
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
v
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
36  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
Importing Data from an  
i.LINK-compatible Device to  
the HDD  
v
After the device (camera, etc.) has been connected using  
an i.Link cable, turn on the power of the device and switch  
it to playback mode. (refer to the device's (camera, etc.)  
instruction manual for more details.)  
v
“HDV/DV RDY” appears on the display window of the unit  
when an iLINK device is recognized.  
Data on devices connected to the i.LINK terminal can be  
imported to the HDD as follows.  
2
v
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The importing screen appears.  
Video formats that can be imported:  
DV and HDV content  
v
Memo:  
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
v
v
v
v
Devices that have in-built copyright protection such as D-VHS and digital  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
tuners cannot be connected. This unit only allows import from tape media.  
Importing will not be performed if no tape has been inserted  
into the HDV/DV camera.  
Importing will be cancelled when the mode is changed from  
HDV to DV or vice versa.  
For camcorders that support both HDV and DV recording, use  
only one of the modes for recording and playback.  
There is no support for editing using a connected PC.  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
v
v
v
&+5%  
Only one i.LINK device can be connected to this unit at a time.  
When importing DV contents with shooting date/time  
information, the date/time information at the beginning of the  
contents will be taken as the shooting date/time information.  
For HDV contents or DV contents without shooting date/time  
information, the importing date/time will be taken as the  
shooting date/time information.  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
3
Select “HDV/DVhHDD” in the importing screen,  
and press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “HDV/DVhHDD” item.  
Note:  
v
v
Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device  
when connecting using an i.LINK compatible device.  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The import selection screen appears.  
v
v
Do not unplug the i.LINK cable while importing to the HDD is in progress.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
v
For example, during full import of HDV content from JVC GY-  
HD100 via i.LINK connection, the beginning of the image may  
not be captured if GY-HD100 is not set as follows.  
(1) Set the [IEEE1394] switch at the rear of the GY-HD100  
unit to [HDV] or [DV] according to the recorded content.  
(2) Set [MENU]/[VIDEO FORMAT]/[PB TAPE] on the GY-  
HD100 unit to [HDV] or [DV].  
Imports data from the beginning  
You can import videos from the beginning till the end as  
follows. If the current position is halfway through the tape,  
import after rewinding the tape to the beginning.  
(As with (1), set according to the recorded content. Setting to  
[AUTO] is not allowed.)  
1
Select “IMPORT FROM BEGINNING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM  
BEGINNING” item.  
(3) Check to ensure that the [HDV] or [DV] lamp on the side of  
the GY-HD100 unit is lit.  
(Check to ensure that the lamp that is lit corresponds to the  
setting in (1) and (2).)  
v
When importing from a tape that contains data captured in the  
HDV recording and DV recording modes, change the video  
camera setting according to each recording mode, check to  
ensure that the corresponding lamp in (3) is lit, and choose to  
start import from the current position.  
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146  
m
Preparations  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
1
Connect the device (camera, etc.) to this unit  
using an i.LINK cable  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
STANDBY/ON  
RESET  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
REC  
HDV/DV IN  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
HDD BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
HDV/DV IN  
&7$$+0)  
.
v
A recording mode selection screen appears.  
.
3
Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]  
button, and select from the pop-up menu  
37  
Dubbing/Importing  
3
Select “RECORDING MODE” and press the [OK]  
button to display the pop-up menu  
Select “XP”, “SP”, “LP”, or “EP” from the “RECORDING  
MODE” option.  
Importing Data from an  
i.LINK-compatible Device to  
the HDD (Continued)  
v
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
v
Select “XP”, “SP”, “LP”, or “EP” from the “RECORDING  
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
MODE” option.  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
52  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
52  
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
Memo:  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
v
HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
Memo:  
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing of the titles starts.  
v
HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.  
v
For more details, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
4
v
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing of the titles starts.  
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
v
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
.
.
Cancel dubbing  
m
To cancel importing before it starts  
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
Imports data from current position  
You can import videos from the current tape position till the  
end as follows.  
v
button to cancel importing of a title.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
1
Select “IMPORT FROM CURRENT POSITION”,  
and press the [OK] button  
A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM CURRENT  
POSITION” item.  
m
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
v
v
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
.
v
A recording mode selection screen appears.  
38  
Dubbing/Importing  
3
On this screen, select “DISCiVIDEO”  
Dubbing a Title from the  
HDD to a BD/DVD  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
Titles stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a BD/DVD  
as follows.  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
Memo:  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
v
Disc types that can be used for dubbing with this unit are:  
BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, and DVD-R.  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
For more details, refer to “Discs that enable both dubbing and  
&+5%  
playback” (A page 10) .  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
v
HD content for which the delete scene operation has been  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless  
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
For details, refer to “Mode conversion” (A page 73) .  
v
A check mark is added to the “DISCiVIDEO” item.  
Note:  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
v
The following high bit-rate files may not meet the Blu-ray  
Memo:  
Disc standards when they are dubbed to a BD.  
v
Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback  
Navigation screen.  
v
When a BDAV/BDMV disc is created (high-speed  
dubbing) by importing content captured in the JVC GY-  
HM700/100 SP mode.  
Select the titles to dub, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button  
Follow Steps 3 to 4 of "Preparation"  
v
When a BDAV disc is created (high-speed dubbing) by  
importing content captured in the JVC GZ-HD7/6 etc  
FHD mode.  
v
When a BDAV/BDMV disc is created by importing  
m
Dubbing titles  
Select “RECORDING FORMAT”, and press the  
[OK] button  
content that is captured using another video camera at a  
peak bit-rate that exceeds 28.8 Mbps.  
1
v
If the Blu-ray Disc standards are not met, playback on  
another player may fail. To ensure that the standards are  
satisfied, perform high-speed dubbing after converting the  
recording mode, or perform dubbing by specifying a  
recording mode.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
m
Preparation  
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
Memo:  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
v
A message appears on the monitor in the following cases  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
where a disc cannot be written to. Take the necessary  
actions according to the message.  
v
Choose a format.  
v
When an incompatible disc type is set  
For more details, refer to “Format chart” (A page 25) .  
v
When there is insufficient space on the set disc  
2
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
v
When a finalized disc is set  
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Dubbing menu screen appears.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
v
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
Select “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” or a recording mode of  
your preference.  
39  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
Dubbing a Title from the  
HDD to a BD/DVD  
(Continued)  
v
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
the title.  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
v
You can perform the following editing operations by  
selecting a title from the dubbing title list and pressing the  
[OK] button.  
Memo:  
v
High-speed dubbing  
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the  
time required for dubbing.  
Make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.  
v
Delete the selected title from the list  
v
Change the list arrangement  
v
Change the name of the selected title  
v
AF/AN/AL/AE  
Select “RENAME TITLE”, and press the [OK] button to  
change the title of the dubbing source. Dubbing of the new  
title is performed.  
Can be selected for BD-R and BD-RE. Dubbing is done  
with HD picture quality.  
v
XP/SP/LP/EP  
5
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
Dubbing is done with SD picture quality.  
v
FR  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
An appropriate mode will be chosen automatically between  
XP to EP according to the remaining memory on the disc.  
For more details, refer to “Dubbing the video data from the  
HDD” (A page 24) and “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
&+5%  
*&&  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
3
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&+5%  
*&&  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
Note:  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
v
“NEXT” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
v
Disc memory is insufficient  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
v
A dubbing title list has not been created  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
Memo:  
v
Steps 6 and 7 are not applicable for “BDAV” and “DVD-VR”  
disc formats. Go to step 8.  
v
A screen for creating a dubbing title list appears.  
4
Create a dubbing title list  
6
Select a background image for the disc menu  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
&+5%  
*&&  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5  
(+0#.+<'  
(+456ꢀ2.#;  
4'2'#6  
10  
010'  
1((  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
1-  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
126+10  
4'6740  
1-  
':+6  
.
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
Follow the steps below to create a dubbing title list.  
v
Select a background image for the disc menu from  
“Background” or “Still Picture”.  
Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
Select the titles to dub, and press the [OK] button  
v
“SELECT FROM DEFAULT BACKGROUND”  
A default background set is used for the disc menu.  
v
“SELECT FROM STILL PICTURES”(only for SR-  
HD1500)  
Use a still image on the HDD for the disc menu.  
The largest size allowed for a still image that is used as  
the background is 5120 x 3840.  
40  
Dubbing/Importing  
Select “REPEAT”, and choose either “OFF” or “ON”  
Memo:  
v
v
The background image of the disc menu can be selected  
“OFF”  
(only for DVD-Video and BD-MV).  
The following sizes are recommended for still images.  
BD : 1920 x 1080  
The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed after all  
the titles are played back.  
v
v
“ON”  
DVD : 720 x 480  
Repeat playback from the first title will start automatically  
after all the titles are played back.  
v
When a still image is used, the two vertical or horizontal  
edges are trimmed based on the side that is smaller than  
the aspect ratio of the video to be dubbed.  
Select “RENAME DISC”, and press the [OK] button  
v
Change the disc name when finalizing is performed.  
8
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
.
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5  
(+0#.+<'  
(+456ꢀ2.#;  
4'2'#6  
10  
Example of Side-cut Still Image  
010'  
1((  
7
Set the operations for finalize  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
v
v
Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the  
dubbing process.  
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&  
After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”  
message appears on the monitor.  
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5  
(+0#.+<'  
(+456ꢀ2.#;  
4'2'#6  
10  
010'  
1((  
Memo:  
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
to return to the previous screen.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
m
Cancel dubbing  
.
To cancel dubbing before it starts  
v
Finalize will be performed after dubbing if “ON” has been  
set for “FINALIZE”.  
If a BD-MV disc is being dubbed, “OFF” cannot be set for  
“FINALIZE”. And once the BD-MV disc is dubbed the disc  
cannot be rewritten.  
v
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
button to cancel dubbing.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
dubbing and return to the initial screen.  
v
If a DVD-Video or BD-MV disc is being dubbed, the settings  
for “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “RENAME DISC” can be  
changed.  
To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress  
v
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button.  
Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select either “NONE”,  
Memo:  
“TOP MENU” or “TITLE 1”  
v
When dubbing to a BD-R or DVD-R, the disc memory will  
v
“NONE”  
be reduced as data will still be written onto the disc up to  
the point where dubbing is discontinued.  
A finalized disc will not be automatically played back  
when it is inserted into another device.  
v
“TOP MENU”  
The disc menu will be displayed automatically when a  
finalized disc is inserted into another device.  
v
“TITLE 1”  
The first title on a finalized disc will be played back  
automatically when it is inserted into another device.  
Memo:  
v
“NONE” cannot be selected for “FIRST PLAY” for BD-MV.  
41  
Dubbing/Importing  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
Dubbing Still Images from  
the HDD  
Still images stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a  
BD-RE or an SD card as follows.  
Memo:  
v
A message appears on the monitor when dubbing cannot  
be performed in the following cases. When this occurs,  
replace the disc or SD card with one that is usable.  
v
When an incompatible disc or SD card is set  
v
When there is insufficient space on the set disc or SD  
card  
Memo:  
v
Only “JPEG” still image format is supported.  
v
For more details, refer to “Dubbing the picture data from the  
When an unformatted disc or SD card is set  
HDD” (A page 24) .  
For details, refer to “Formatting a disc” (A page 25) or  
“Formatting an SD Card” (A page 27) .  
m
Before dubbing  
Dubbing to a disc  
5
Select the still images to dub, and press the  
[MARK] button  
v
Set the BD-RE for dubbing on the disc tray  
v
Dubbing to an SD card  
&7$$+0)  
Insert the SD card to be dubbed into the [SD SLOT]  
56'2  
%4'#6'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ.+56ꢀ(14ꢀ&7$$+0)  
)4172  
2CIG  
m
Dubbing still images  
#..  
1
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Dubbing menu screen appears.  
v
2
On this screen, select “DISC/SDiPICTURE”  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
)4172  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
.
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
v
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected image.  
All still images with a check mark are dubbed.  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
Memo:  
&+5%  
v
To clear the check mark, select the corresponding still  
image, and press the [MARK] button.  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
v
Pressing the [OPTION] button displays a pop-up menu.  
The pop-up menu enables you to perform the following  
operations.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
3
Select the media to dub to from the media  
selection screen  
A checkmark will be added to the selected media.  
BACK  
: Exits the pop-menu and returns to the  
initial screen.  
v
SELECT ALL  
: Selects all still images within the same  
group.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
DESELECT ALL : Clears the selection of all still images  
within the same group.  
+05'46ꢁ#0&ꢁ5'.'%6ꢁ#ꢁ/'&+#  
Note:  
v
A message appears if the selected still images do not fit  
into the disc. Check mark cannot be added to a still image if  
there is insufficient space on the disc.  
*&&  
$&ꢀ4'  
*&&  
5&ꢁ%#4&  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
42  
Dubbing/Importing  
6
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
m
Dubbing from the Playback Navigation  
screen  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback Navigation  
screen.  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&7$$+0)ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5  
1
Select the still images to dub, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ&7$$'&ꢂꢀꢃꢃꢃ  
126+105  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
'&+6ꢀ+0(1  
16*'45  
v
v
Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the  
dubbing process.  
After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”  
message appears on the monitor.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
Memo:  
v
A directory of the following configuration is created in the  
2
3
Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button  
media, and still images are written with file names ranging  
from “PIC_0001.jpg” to “PIC_9999.jpg”.  
Follow steps 3 to 5 of “Dubbing still images”  
Memo:  
root  
DCIM  
100JVCS  
PIC_0001.JPG  
PIC_0002.JPG  
PIC_0003.JPG  
v
Check marks of still images that appear on the Playback  
navigation screen will remain added to the image on the  
still image selection screen.  
m
Cancel dubbing  
101JVCS  
PIC_0001.JPG  
PIC_0002.JPG  
PIC_0003.JPG  
To cancel dubbing before it starts  
v
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
button to cancel dubbing.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
.
dubbing and return to the initial screen.  
To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress  
v
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button.  
43  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
Enabling Playback on  
v
To cancel the finalizing operation, select “NO” and press  
the [OK] button.  
Other Devices (Finalizing)  
5
Setting the top menu items  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs may need to be finalized before  
they can be played on other DVD players.  
(+0#.+<'  
Memo:  
v
Discs in the Video mode becomes a DVD-Video format with  
6*'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ9+..ꢁ$'ꢁ(+0#.+<'&ꢁ61ꢁ'0#$.'ꢁ2.#;$#%-ꢁ10ꢁ16*'4ꢁ&8&ꢁ&'8+%'5  
&8&ꢀ49ꢁ8KFGQ  
a title menu after finalizing.  
v
%*#0)'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ/'07ꢁ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ&'(#7.6ꢁ$#%-)4170&  
Discs containing DVD-Video data can be finalized by  
setting the disc operation settings according when the disc  
is inserted into this unit.  
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ56+..ꢁ2+%674'5  
v
(+456ꢁ2.#;  
4'2'#6  
612ꢁ/'07  
1((  
Recording or editing of the disc will not be possible after it  
is finalized.  
v
If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been  
(+0#.+<'  
&1ꢁ016ꢁ(+0#.+<'  
finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode  
compatible devices.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
/'&+#ꢁ/#0#)'  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
v
Before finalizing, set “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT”, and  
“CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” accordingly.  
Set according to the steps below.  
Finalizing  
1
2
Set the BD or DVD to be finalized on the disc tray  
Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select an appropriate first  
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
The Media Management menu screen appears.  
play setting item  
v
This item is used for setting the disc operation when a  
v
finalized disc is inserted into another device.  
NONE  
: A finalized disc will not be automatically  
played back when it is inserted into another  
device.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
TOP MENU : The disc menu will be displayed  
automatically when a finalized disc is  
inserted into another device.  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
TITLE 1  
: The first title on a finalized disc will be  
played back automatically when it is  
inserted into another device.  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
Select “REPEAT”, and select an appropriate repeat  
setting item  
v
.
Set the disc action to be taken after all titles have been  
played back.  
3
Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”  
OFF : The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed  
after all the titles are played back.  
4
Select “YES” and press the [OK] button  
The top menu setting screen appears.  
v
ON  
: Repeat playback from the first title will start  
automatically after all the titles are played back.  
%10(+4/  
&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(+0#.+<'&ꢀ(14ꢀ2.#;$#%-ꢀ10ꢀ16*'4ꢀ&8&ꢀ&'8+%'5  
+6ꢀ9+..ꢀ6#-'ꢀ#$176ꢀ::ꢀ/+076'5  
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ(+0#.+<#6+10ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#465  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(+0#.+<'!  
;'5  
01  
.
44  
Dubbing/Importing  
Select “CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” to  
select a background image for the top menu  
Unfinalizing a disc  
Only DVD-RW discs that are finalized on this unit can be  
unfinalized.  
After a disc is unfinalized, addition of new titles and editing  
are possible.  
v
You can register and use a background image of your  
preference.  
(+0#.+<'  
Note:  
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ#5ꢀ$#%-)4170&ꢀ&'5+)0ꢀ(14ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'07ꢀ5%4''0  
2CIG  
v
All discs except DVD-RW (VR mode) cannot be unfinalized.  
)4172  
#..  
m
To unfinalize a disc  
1
Set a DVD-RW disc that is finalized by this unit  
on the disc tray  
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
The media management menu screen appears.  
v
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
4'6740  
.
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
Memo:  
$&ꢁ&8&  
v
The items in “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “CHANGE  
DISC MENU BACKGROUND” can also be set in “Dubbing  
a Title from the HDD to a BD/DVD” (A page 39) .  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
6
Select “FINALIZE”, and press the [OK] button  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(+0#.+<'  
(14/#6  
6*'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ9+..ꢁ$'ꢁ(+0#.+<'&ꢁ61ꢁ'0#$.'ꢁ2.#;$#%-ꢁ10ꢁ16*'4ꢁ&8&ꢁ&'8+%'5  
&8&ꢀ49ꢁ8KFGQ  
.
%*#0)'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ/'07ꢁ$#%-)4170&  
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ&'(#7.6ꢁ$#%-)4170&  
3
4
Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”  
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ56+..ꢁ2+%674'5  
Select “YES” and press the [OK] button  
(+456ꢁ2.#;  
4'2'#6  
612ꢁ/'07  
1((  
FINALIZE  
&1ꢁ016ꢁ(+0#.+<'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
/'&+#ꢁ/#0#)'  
.
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ70(+0#.+<'  
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ:::ꢀ/+076'5  
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ241%'55ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#46'&  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ70(+0#.+<'!  
v
v
Finalizing starts.  
After finalization is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
FINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.  
;'5  
01  
.
%10(+4/  
v
v
Unfinalizing starts.  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(+0#.+<'&  
After unfinalizing is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
UNFINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.  
1-  
.
45  
Dubbing/Importing  
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
The disc tray will open automatically.  
Copying the Entire Disc  
v
5
6
Set the source BD or DVD on the disc tray  
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Copying the entire disc allows all content on a BD (BDMV) or  
DVD (AVCHD, DVD-Video) to be copied onto another disc.  
Note:  
v
Content cannot be copied to a formatted BD-R or DVD-R  
disc. Make use of an unformatted disc.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
v
Use a DVD-R/-RW instead of a BD-R/-RE or DVD when the  
source disc is a BD disc.  
v
The disc to be copied onto will be formatted when copy is  
performed. Check that the disc has not been used before  
or if it is ok to delete data on the disc when using a BD-RE  
or a DVD-RW.  
+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ%12+'&  
v
In the case of BD, volume labels are not copied.  
v
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
If an unsupported disc is set, “UNABLE TO IMPORT FROM  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
DISC” or “UNABLE TO DUB ONTO DISC INSERT  
ANOTHER DISC” will be displayed on the monitor. Use a  
disc that is supported by this unit.  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
v
The disc tray will close automatically. The source BD or  
DVD will be recognized, and copying to the internal HDD  
will proceed.  
For details on discs that are supported by this unit, refer to  
“Discs that enable both dubbing and playback” (A page 10)  
and “Discs that enable playback only” (A page 10) .  
The disc tray will open automatically after copying has  
finished and “READY TO COPY NOW. INSERT THE DISC  
FOR COPYING” will be displayed on the monitor.  
1
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Dubbing screen appears.  
v
Memo:  
v
Confirm the insufficient space on the internal HDD when  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
the copy interrupts.  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
7
8
Set a BD or DVD to copy on the disc tray  
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
8+&'1  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
4'#&;ꢀ61ꢀ%12;ꢀ019ꢂꢀ+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ(14ꢀ%12;+0)  
.
2
Select “DISChDISC”, and press the [OK] button  
A menu screen for copying the entire disc appears.  
v
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
Memo:  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
v
During copy of the entire disc, data is temporarily copied to  
.
the internal HDD.  
v
The disc tray will close automatically. BD or DVD will be  
recognized, and the contents that were copied to the HDD  
will be copied to the disc.  
v
Only discs that are not copyright-protected can be copied.  
3
Set the number of discs to copy using the [ J / K ]  
buttons  
You can specify up to a maximum of 10 discs.  
Memo:  
v
v
The copy operation will not be performed when the  
remaining disc memory is not sufficient.  
&7$$+0)  
52'%+(;ꢀ6*'ꢀ07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5ꢀ#0&ꢀ5'.'%6ꢀ̌':'%76'̍  
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5  
2
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
46  
Dubbing/Importing  
9
Complete the entire disc copying  
After copy is complete the tray will open automatically, and  
copy of the entire disc ends.  
Recording Using External  
Inputs  
Videos on an external device that is connected to i.LINK (HDV/  
DV) or video / S-video input can be recorded to the HDD.  
BD, DVD can be recorded from the [VIDEO]/[S-VIDEO] input.  
v
Memo:  
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
%10(+4/  
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀ:::ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1
2
3
Press the [HDD] or [BD/SD] button to select the  
location to record the file  
1-  
Press the [INPUT SELECT] button on the remote  
control, and choose external input (HDV/DV or L-1)  
Press the [REC MODE] button and select a  
recording mode  
.
4
Press the [ R ] and [ I ] remote control buttons  
Memo:  
together to start the recording process  
v
The screen prompting you to insert a new disc appears  
v
Recording can also be start by pressing the [ R ] button on  
this unit.  
repeatedly until this unit has finished copying the number of  
discs specified in Step 3. When the message appears, set  
a new BD or DVD on the disc tray, select “START”, and  
press the [OK] button.  
5
Operate the external device using i.LINK(HDV/  
DV) or the video/S-video input to output the  
videos to be recorded  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
6
Press the [ o ] button on either this unit or the  
remote control to display the pop-up screen,  
choose “STOP” and press the [OK] button  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
v
End the recording.  
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀꢂ56ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
+05'46ꢀ#ꢀ0'9ꢀ&+5%  
Memo:  
v
When recording images via a video camera using i.LINK  
connection, recording may stopped if the video camera is  
loaded with a DV tape while in the shooting mode. In this  
case, remove the DV tape before recording.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
v
v
v
Recording will be stopped if the maximum recording time has  
been reached, or if there is insufficient memory in the media.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
For HDV contents, “DR” will be used to record instead of the  
selected recording mode.  
v
v
After copy is complete, the data copied onto the HDD will  
be deleted.  
RECORDABLE MEDIA  
RECORDING  
MODE  
RECORDABLE MEDIA  
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]  
button to cancel disc copying.  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
(VR format) (BD-AV format)  
BD-RE  
DR  
HDV  
-
-
-
-
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
AF (HD)  
AN (HD)  
AL (HD)  
AE (HD)  
XP (SD)  
SP (SD)  
LP (SD)  
EP (SD)  
-
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
-
-
-
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
%10(+4/  
-
-
-
-
-
-
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ%#0%'.ꢀ&7$$+0)!  
;'5  
01  
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
.
v
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS RECORDING TIME  
HDD : 24 hours (*1)  
DVD-RW : 8 hours  
BD-RE : 8 hours  
*1: Title will automatically be split into time separated by 8  
hours. The dividing point will not be recorded.  
For the recording modes and maximum recording time for  
each disc, refer to “Recording Modes” (A page 28) .  
47  
Playing Back  
About Playing Back  
Using Playback Navigation  
Videos or edited videos stored on the internal HDD, as well as  
videos stored on a disc or SD card can be played back on this unit.  
The types of media that are playable on this unit are as follows.  
Videos can be easily played back for viewing using the  
“Playback Navigation” function available on this unit.  
v
Videos and still images stored on the internal HDD  
Displaying the Playback Navigation screen  
v
Videos stored on different disc types  
v
1
Select the location of the playback file  
Press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit  
Play back videos or still images stored on the HDD.  
Press the [BD/SD] button on the remote control unit.  
Videos and still images stored on backup discs created  
using the “Everio Writer”  
v
v
Videos and still images stored on SD cards  
v
These videos can be easily played back for viewing using the  
“Playback Navigation” software that comes with this unit.  
For details on the “Playback Navigation” software, refer to  
“Using Playback Navigation” (A page 48) .  
Play back videos or still images stored on a BD/DVD or a  
SD.  
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
Memo:  
v
This unit does not support DivX videos.  
v
v
If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black bars may appear  
on the left and right borders depending on the video resolution.  
Memo:  
v
Pressing the [BD/SD] button each time switches the media  
to play back between BD/DVD and SD.  
v
To display MOV* files stored on an SD card using Playback  
Navigation, make use of list display. Thumbnail display is  
not supported. Files on the SD card cannot be played back  
directly. To do so, import them into a HDD.  
v
You can also switch the media to play back by pressing the  
[HDD] or [BD/SD] button when the Playback Navigation  
screen is displayed.  
v
For details on importing MOV* files from an SD card, refer to  
“Importing Data from an SD Card to the HDD” (A page 35) .  
MOV* : MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the JVC  
ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
Operating Playback Navigation  
m
Playing a video/still image  
Plays the selected video/still image.  
Display Marks on the Playback Navigation Screen  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
Icon  
Mark name  
Explanation  
2CIG  
Protect Mark Indicates protected titles.  
)4172  
.
001  
002  
003  
004  
Mode  
Conversion  
Preset Mark  
Indicates titles for which mode  
conversion has been preset.  
VKVNG  
.
005  
006  
007  
008  
Not Viewed  
Mark  
Indicates titles that have not  
been viewed or groups  
containing titles that have not  
been viewed.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
.
.
v
Select a title to play back, followed by pressing the [OK] or  
[I] button to play the selected video/still image.  
Scene  
Indicates titles for which scene  
.
Delete Mark delete or chapter delete has  
been applied.  
Memo:  
v
Select a group and press the [OK] button to display all titles  
in the group.  
Group Mark  
Indicates a group.  
.
Playlist Mark Indicates a playlist.  
.
Not Playable Indicates titles that cannot be  
Mark  
played.  
.
Question  
Mark  
Indicates titles of which the  
thumbnails cannot be  
displayed. Playback may not be  
possible.  
.
48  
Playing Back  
m
m
Switching between thumbnail and list  
displays  
Switching between video and still image  
displays  
You can switch between the thumbnail display and list display  
of a video.  
You can switch the display between the video thumbnail list  
screen and still image thumbnail screen.  
v
v
When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed  
When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
2CIG  
)4172  
)4172  
001  
002  
003  
004  
001  
002  
003  
004  
VKVNG  
VKVNG  
005  
006  
007  
008  
005  
006  
007  
008  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
1-  
4'6740  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
.
.
Press the [RED] button to display the title list screen.  
When the title list screen is displayed  
Press the [GREEN] button to display the still image  
thumbnail list screen.  
v
v
When the still image thumbnail list screen is displayed  
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢄ.+56ꢅ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
2CIG  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
)4172  
#..  
2CIG  
(1.&'4  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
#PKOCN  
5'.'%6  
1-  
4'6740  
)4172  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
6*7/$0#+. 2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
%106'06  
(1.&'4  
.
4'6740  
.
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list  
screen.  
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list  
screen.  
m
Displaying a group/folder  
A group/folder screen can be displayed.  
m
Displaying the Option menu  
Displaying the Option menu enables you to perform different  
operations on a selected title/group, including “BACK”,  
“PLAY”, “DELETE”, “DUB”, “GROUP”, “UNGROUP”, “DO  
NOT GROUP”, “MODE CHANGE”, “EDIT”, “EDIT INFO” and  
“OTHERS”.  
6+6.'.+56ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
)4172  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
#..  
2CIG  
9GFFKPI  
&TKXKPI  
$KTVJFC[ꢄ%QOOKVVGG  
6TCXGN  
001  
2KEPKE  
1
Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
An Option menu appears.  
5RQTVUꢄFC[  
2KCPQꢄEQPEGTV  
v
005  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+105  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
$#%-  
1-  
4'6740  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
.
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
Press the [YELLOW] button to display the group/folder  
screen.  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
005  
006  
007  
008  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
49  
Playing Back  
v
EDIT INFO  
Using Playback Navigation  
(Continued)  
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.  
MODIFY TITLE NAME/MODIFY GROUP NAME  
Switches to the rename screen for the selected title/  
group name.  
For details, refer to “Changing the Title/Group Name” (A  
page 62) .  
v
2
Select an operation option, and press the [OK]  
button  
v
Options that cannot be operated are displayed in gray and  
cannot be selected.  
v
MODIFY THUMBNAIL  
For details on the Option menu items, refer to “Option menu  
list” (A page 50) .  
Switches to the thumbnail modification screen of the  
selected title.  
For details, refer to “Editing a Thumbnail” (A page 66) .  
v
MODIFY DATE  
Option menu list  
BACK  
Switches to the recording date modification screen of the  
selected title.  
For details, refer to “Changing the Shooting Date/Time”  
(A page 72) .  
v
Returns to the previous screen.  
v
PLAY  
v
PROTECT  
Plays back the selected title/group.  
For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
to “Video Playback Operation” (A page 51) .  
Switches to the protection screen of the selected title/  
group.  
v
For details, refer to “Turning On Title/Group Protection”  
(A page 63) .  
DELETE  
Deletes a selected title/group.  
For details, refer to “Deleting a Title/Group” (A page 62) .  
v
UNPROTECT  
v
Switches to the screen for turning off protection of the  
selected title/group.  
For details, refer to “Turning Off Title/Group Protection”  
(A page 64) .  
DUB  
Performs dubbing of a selected title/group.  
For details, refer to “Dubbing/Importing” (A page 23) .  
v
GROUP  
Groups the selected titles/groups.  
For details, refer to “Grouping” (A page 60) .  
v
OTHERS  
Switches to the menu screen of the other-items.  
v
CHAPTER LIST  
v
UNGROUP  
Ungroups a selected group.  
For details, refer to “Ungrouping” (A page 60) .  
v
DETAILS  
v
THUMBNAIL  
v
LIST  
v
DO NOT GROUP  
v
VIDEO  
Removes the selected titles from a group.  
For details, refer to “Excluding from a group” (A page  
61) .  
v
PICTURE  
v
GROUP  
v
v
MODE CHANGE  
FOLDER SELECT  
v
Changes the mode of the selected title/group.  
For details, refer to “Mode conversion” (A page 73) .  
CONTENT  
v
CHAPTER LIST  
Displays the chapters of a selected title.  
v
EDIT  
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.  
v
CHAPTER EDIT  
Switches to the chapter edit screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to “Editing a Chapter” (A page 67) .  
v
PLAYLIST EDIT  
Switches to the playlist edit screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to “Creating a Playlist” (A page 65) .  
v
DELETE SCENE  
Switches to the delete scene screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to “Delete Scenes” (A page 70) .  
v
DIVIDE  
Switches to the dividing screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to “Dividing” (A page 69) .  
50  
Playing Back  
Frequently used button operations  
Video Playback Operation  
m
[ I ] button  
v
If the stop position (resume point) is memorized in the  
selected video, pressing the button plays back the video  
from this position.  
The video may not resume playback depending on the  
media and settings used. Refer to “RESUME” (A page  
77) .  
v
If playback is paused (Still mode), pressing the button  
resumes playback.  
m
[ o ] button  
v
Pressing the button stops playback after memorizing the  
stop position (resume point).  
v
Pressing the button again after playback stops clears the  
memory of the stop position (resume point).  
m
[ W ] button  
Pressing the button stops playback temporarily.  
v
m
[ N ] button  
v
Pressing the button once during playback switches to a  
playback speed of 1.3 times (with audio sound).  
v
Pressing the button in the 1.3x playback or fast forward  
mode fast forwards the video.  
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.  
(5xh10xh30xh60x)  
.
Memo:  
v
The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an  
approximate amount.  
v
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode forwards the video  
frame by frame.  
Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode  
starts playback in slow motion.  
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion  
switches the playback speed. The speed changes each  
time the button is pressed.  
(1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)  
m
[ O ] button  
v
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, fast forward, or fast  
reverse, pressing the button fast reverses playback.  
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.  
(1xh5xh10xh30x)  
v
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode reverses the video  
frame by frame.  
Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode  
starts reverse playback of the video in slow motion.  
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion  
switches the playback speed. The speed changes each  
time the button is pressed.  
(1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)  
Memo:  
v
The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an  
approximate amount.  
m
[ T ] / [ S ] button  
Pressing any of the buttons moves the chapter position.  
v
m
[MARK] button  
v
Pressing the button enables you to add a chapter mark to a  
title.  
51  
Playing Back  
Useful button operations  
Video Playback Operation  
(Continued)  
[ v ] button  
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion  
m
[PB MODE] button  
Displays the Playback Settings screen, which enables you  
v
to modify the settings.  
For details, refer to “Changing Playback Settings”.  
m
v
m
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button  
moves the playback position forward by about 30 seconds.  
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to the  
position equivalent to the number of times pressed  
multiplied by 30 seconds.  
[AUDIO] button  
Switches the audio channel.  
v
m
[SUB TITLE] button  
Switches the subtitle display.  
v
v
Normal playback will resume after the position has been  
m
[ANGLE] button  
Switches the angle.  
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will  
continue after the position has been moved.  
Contents may be played back in the normal mode  
depending on the type of disc or content.  
v
Memo:  
v
Pressing the [AUDIO], [SUB TITLE], or [ANGLE] button has  
no effect if their selection is not available in the playback  
video.  
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current  
paused position forward by about 30 seconds while  
maintaining the Still mode.  
m
[ w ] button  
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion  
v
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button  
moves the playback position back by about seven seconds.  
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to the  
position equivalent to the number of times pressed  
multiplied by seven seconds.  
v
Normal playback will resume after the position has been  
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will  
continue after the position has been moved.  
Contents may be played back in the normal mode  
depending on the type of disc or content.  
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current  
paused position back by about seven seconds while  
maintaining the Still mode.  
m
[HDD] button  
During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing  
v
the button stops the current playback and switches to the  
“HDD” mode.  
Pressing the button during display of the Playback  
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation  
screen for the “HDD” mode.  
m
[BD/SD] button  
During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing  
v
the button stops the current playback and switches from  
“BD/DVD” to “SD” or vice versa.  
Pressing the button during display of the Playback  
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation  
screen for the other media. During playback of videos on  
the “HDD”, pressing the button stops the current playback  
and switches to “BD/DVD” mode.  
Memo:  
v
The display switches automatically to the SD mode only if  
the inserted SD card contains playable videos or still  
images.  
52  
Playing Back  
Playing an EverioBackup Disc*  
EverioBackup* : Data disc containing high-definition videos  
that are recorded in the MPEG2 format  
Playing Videos on a BD/  
DVD  
using a DVD writer for Everio.  
Playback starts automatically after a BD/DVD is set.  
If the Auto Play feature is disabled, play the title using  
Playback Navigation.  
1
Set the disc on the disc tray  
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
Memo:  
v
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Playback of the selected title starts.  
to “Video Playback Operation” (A page 51) .  
v
Memo:  
Playing a disc when Auto Play is enabled  
v
If the current playback location is HDD or SD, press the  
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to BD/  
DVD.  
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
Auto Play starts.  
v
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Playing a disc when Auto Play is disabled  
Pressing the [I] button plays back titles starting from that  
with the oldest recording date.  
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
Playing Video Discs Created Using a PC  
Videos that are created using a PC can be played back using  
Playback Navigation.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
1
Set the disc on the disc tray  
001  
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Playback of the selected title starts.  
v
Memo:  
v
The formats that can be played back are BDAV, BDMV,  
DVD-Video and DVD-VR (CPRM-compatible).  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
'06'4  
$#%-  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
v
v
If the current playback location is HDD or SD CARD, press  
the [BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to  
BD/DVD.  
.
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Playback of the selected title starts.  
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop  
position (resume point) of the disc.  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the  
setting for resume has been set to “OFF”, playback starts  
from the beginning of the disc.  
Memo:  
v
If the current playback location is HDD or SD, press the  
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to BD/  
DVD.  
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop  
position (resume point) of the disc.  
v
Playback may not be possible due to compatibility  
problems.  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the  
setting for resume has been set to “OFF”, playback starts  
from the beginning of the disc.  
53  
Playing Back  
Playing Videos on the HDD  
Playing Videos on a SD  
Card  
Titles stored on the HDD can be played back using Playback  
Navigation.  
Titles stored on an SD card can be played back using  
Playback Navigation.  
You can select a video to play from “Title”, “Group”, or  
“Playlist”.  
You can select a video to play from “Title”.  
Memo:  
v
1
Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]  
For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
v
to “Video Playback Operation” (A page 51) .  
Switch the playback location to “SD CARD” after the SD  
card is detected by the unit.  
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
Playing titles stored on the HDD  
v
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2
Select the titles to playback, and press the [I]  
button  
001  
v
Playback of the selected title starts.  
Memo:  
v
If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or “SD CARD”,  
press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit to switch  
it to “HDD”.  
v
v
To play back specific titles within a group, select the group,  
press the [OK] button, and select the titles accordingly.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
'06'4  
$#%-  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
.
Pressing the [I] button starts playback of the most recently  
played title.  
If there are no recently played titles, playback starts from  
the title with the most recent recording date.  
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Playback of the selected title starts.  
v
Memo:  
v
Playback navigation displays AVCHD files stored on the SD  
card in titles, not in scenes (chapters). Titles are grouped  
such as according to the date, recording mode, or number  
of scenes. Make use of thumbnail display to display titles.  
List display is not supported.  
v
The formats that can be played back are AVCHD and SD-  
VIDEO. If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black  
bars may appear on the left and right borders depending on  
the video resolution.  
v
When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-  
VIDEO, MOV*) in the SD card, press the [RED] button to  
select the format you want to display.  
MOV*: MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the JVC  
ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop  
position (resume point).  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized,  
playback starts from the beginning of the playable content.  
If the setting for “QUICK STARTUP” is set to “OFF”, the  
resume point will not be memorized when the power is  
turned OFF.  
For details on the button operations during playback, refer to  
“Video Playback Operation” (A page 51) .  
54  
Playing Back  
Enabled button operations during still  
Playing Still Images (JPEG)  
Still images stored on the HDD/BD/DVD/SD card can be  
played back using Playback Navigation.  
image playback  
m
[ I ] button  
v
Pressing the button when a title/group is selected starts  
playback of the still images in the title/group in a slideshow.  
Playing still images  
m
[ o ] button  
Pressing the button stops the slideshow and displays the  
Playback Navigation screen.  
1
Select the playback location  
v
HDD  
: If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or  
“SD CARD”, press the [HDD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “HDD”.  
m
[ W ] button  
Pressing the button stops the slideshow temporarily.  
v
BD/DVD : If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD  
CARD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “BD/DVD”.  
m
[ S ] / [ T ] button  
Pressing the button displays the previous or next still  
image.  
v
SD card : If the current playback location is “HDD” or “BD/  
DVD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “SD CARD”.  
m
[ A ] button  
Pressing the button ends playback of the still images and  
turns the power of the unit to "Off".  
2
Set the media  
v
v
To play a media other than “HDD”, set the media on which  
the still images are stored.  
Memo:  
v
The display of still images can be zoomed in/out or rotated  
BD/DVD : Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
using the following buttons when the slideshow is paused.  
SD card : Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]  
v
[ v ] / [BLUE] button  
3
Select the still images to play, and press the [ I ]  
button  
Rotates the still image by 90° in the anti-clockwise  
direction.  
v
Images selected are played back in a slideshow.  
v
[ w ] / [YELLOW] button  
Rotates the still image by 90° in the clockwise direction.  
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
v
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
[OK] / [RED] button  
2CIG  
Enlarges the still image.  
(1.&'4  
v
[RETURN] / [GREEN] button  
Reduces the still image.  
v
[ J / K / H / I ] button  
Moves the display position toward the direction indicated  
by the button.  
v
v
This unit does not have a still image edit feature. Still  
images cannot be saved when they are zoomed in or  
rotated.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
%106'06  
(1.&'4  
4'6740  
.
Priority of display is given to the media (“BD/DVD” or “SD  
CARD”) that contains playable still images.  
If both “BD/DVD” and “SD CARD” contain playable videos,  
priority of display will be given to the most recently used  
media.  
Memo:  
v
The slide show plays back images according to the date of  
the files.  
v
v
If folders exist, files inside the selected folder will be played.  
You can specify the “REPEAT”, “SLIDESHOW INTERVAL”  
and “SLIDESHOW EFFECTS” settings in the Playback  
Settings menu.  
For details, refer to the “REPEAT” (A page 56) ,  
“SLIDESHOW INTERVAL” (A page 56) , and  
“SLIDESHOW EFFECTS” (A page 56) items under  
“Playback Settings”.  
55  
Playing Back  
Playback settings  
Changing Playback  
Settings  
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)  
4'2'#6  
1((  
%*#0)'ꢀ6+6.'  
%*#0)'ꢀ%*#26'4  
6+/'ꢀ,7/2  
Displaying the playback settings menu  
1
Press the [PB MODE] button on the remote  
control unit during the playback of a title  
The Settings Menu screen appears.  
v
v
The playback settings menu can only be displayed during  
the playback of a title.  
.
v
Only settings that are supported by the current title being  
played back can be changed in the playback settings  
menu.  
m
REPEAT  
The following items can be set.  
Items are not displayed if they cannot be set.  
Items displayed in gray cannot be set.  
Setting Values  
OFF  
Description  
Turns off repeat.  
Playback Settings Menu  
Repeats playback of the currently played  
title.  
TITLE  
Audio/subtitle settings  
Repeats playback of the currently played  
chapter.  
CHAPTER  
TRACK  
Repeats playback of the currently played  
track.  
#7&+1ꢁ57$6+6.'  
#7&+1ꢂ.#0)7#)'  
.ꢁ4  
Repeats playback within the currently  
played folder.  
FOLDER  
%*#0)'ꢂ#7&+1ꢂ176276  
57$6+6.'ꢂ.#0)7#)'  
Repeats playback of the entire disc.  
ALL  
A-B  
Repeats playback of the section between the  
specified starting and ending points.  
Pressing the [OK] button specifies the  
displayed scene as the starting point (Point  
A). Pressing the [OK] button after forwarding  
playback specifies the displayed scene as the  
ending point (Point B).  
.
Memo:  
m
CHANGE TITLE  
v
“AUDIO/SUBTITLE” will be displayed only if they are  
available in the video content. The setting value differs  
depending on the content. Items that are not available in  
the content cannot be set.  
You can change to a different title by entering the corresponding  
numeric value. Any value that is larger than the number of titles  
cannot be entered.  
m
CHANGE CHAPTER  
m
m
m
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
You can change to a different chapter by entering the  
corresponding numeric value. Any value that is larger than the  
number of chapters cannot be entered.  
CHANGE AUDIO OUTPUT  
m
SIGNAL TYPE (BD-ROM)  
PRIMARY VIDEO  
TIME JUMP  
v
v
v
v
v
v
You can move to a specific playback position by entering a time.  
This is not possible if the specified time is not valid.  
PRIMARY AUDIO  
m
SECONDARY VIDEO  
SLIDESHOW INTERVAL  
CHANGE SECONDARY VIDEO  
SECONDARY AUDIO  
The following items can be set.  
3SEC/5SEC/10SEC/20SEC/30SEC modes  
SECONDARY AUDIO LANGUAGE  
m
SLIDESHOW EFFECTS  
The following items can be set.  
m
m
m
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE STYLE  
CHANGE ANGLE  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off slideshow effect.  
Turns on slideshow effect. “Fade out” and  
“Fade in” effects can be applied when  
switching from one slide to another.  
56  
Playing Back  
m
Video settings  
PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT  
The following items can be set.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
8+&'1ꢀ5'66+0)  
2+%674'ꢀ37#.+6;  
014/#.  
1((  
AUTO1  
Displays video images after they are  
converted according to the film material.  
&+)+6#.ꢀ01+5'ꢀ4'&7%6+10  
241)4'55+8'ꢀ176276  
#761ꢁ  
AUTO2  
In addition to the “AUTO1” option, support is  
also provided for progressive videos recorded  
at 30 frames per second.  
VIDEO  
Most suitable for video images (TV broadcast,  
etc.). Select this option when playing videos  
with significant movements or animated  
videos.  
.
m
PICTURE QUALITY  
The following items can be set.  
Setting Values  
Description  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
FINE  
Standard picture quality.  
Effective when playing movies.  
Produces sharp images with enhanced  
outlines.  
SOFT  
Reduces noise that is prominent in the  
video image.  
USER  
SETTING  
Enables the Details setting. For more  
details, refer to “DETAIL SETTING”.  
m
DETAIL SETTING  
The following items can be set.  
Choose an option and press [OK] to set the respective values.  
Setting Values  
Description  
CONTRAST  
A value between “-7” and “+7” can be set.  
BRIGHTNESS A value between “0” and “15” can be set.  
SHARPNESS  
COLOR  
A value between “-6” and “+6” can be set.  
A value between “-7” and “+7” can be set.  
A value between “0” and “5” can be set.  
GAMMA  
m
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION  
The following items can be set.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off DNR (Digital Noise Reduction).  
Reduces noise that is prominent in images  
of lengthy videos.  
57  
Editing  
Editing  
Before editing  
This unit mainly edits video images stored on the HDD. To edit video images stored in a disc or SD card, do so after importing  
them to the HDD.  
Data on a finalized disc cannot be edited. To edit a finalized disc, you have to either unfinalize the disc, or do so after importing  
the data to the HDD.  
Memo:  
v
Only discs that are finalized using this unit can be unfinalized.  
Editable items for different media  
Items that are editable vary according to the type of media on which the video data is stored. For details, refer to the media chart  
below.  
m
Media chart  
Editing option  
HDD  
BD-R  
(BDAV)  
BD-RE  
(BDAV)  
DVD-RW/  
DVD-R  
SD  
HDD/BD-  
RE/SD  
(picture)  
Grouping  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
-
-
V
V
V
V
-
-
V
V
V
V
-
-
V
V
*1  
*1  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Changing the Title/Group Name  
Deleting a Title/Group  
Turning On Title/Group Protection  
Turning Off Title/Group Protection  
Creating a Playlist  
V
V
-
-
Editing a Thumbnail  
V
*2  
-
V
*2  
-
V
*1,*2  
-
-
Editing a Chapter  
-
Delete Scene  
-
Dividing  
-
-
-
-
Changing the Disc Name  
Changing the Shooting Date/Time  
V
-
V
-
V
-
-
V
-
Memo:  
*1 : Supports only the “VR MODE”.  
*2 : Supports only dividing and combining of chapters.  
58  
Editing  
Entering characters  
Entering Characters  
Names can be changed or given to stored videos or groups.  
You can enter characters while referring to the input on the  
monitor.  
1
Enter characters using the [0]-[9], [Z] or [#]  
buttons  
2
After character input is complete, press the  
[YELLOW] button  
Memo:  
Character input screen  
v
Switch between alphanumeric and symbol input by  
pressing the [ w ] button.  
v
v
For details on the correspondence between each button  
and the input characters, refer to the “Character List”.  
4'0#/'ꢎ6+6.'  
Press the [ v ] button to delete an input character.  
Press and hold down the [ v ] button to delete all input  
characters.  
4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ5'.'%6'&ꢎ6+6.'  
v
Pressing the [RETURN] button calls up the confirmation  
screen to cancel character input.  
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ  
IJKꢅ  
CDEꢄ  
LMNꢆ  
FGHꢍ  
OPQꢇ  
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ248  
To cancel character input and return to the initial screen,  
select “YES” and press the [OK] button.  
To return to the character input screen, select “NO” and  
press the [OK] button.  
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ0':6  
RSTUꢈ  
VWXꢉ  
YZ[\ꢌ  
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'  
%.'#4  
v
Up to about 20 alphanumeric characters can be displayed  
on the disc menu of BDMV and DVD-VIDEO. (The number  
of characters that can be displayed varies with the  
character.)  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
%10(+4/  
+0(1ꢀ%144'%6  
.
A Function name field  
B Screen description  
C Input window  
Note:  
v
If you switch the screen display before confirming the input  
characters, a message will appear on the screen.  
To cancel character input and proceed to switch the screen  
display, select “YES” and press the [OK] button.  
To return to the character input screen, select “NO” and  
press the [OK] button.  
Characters entered appear on the input window.  
D Operation guide 1  
The [0]-[9], [Z], [#], [PAGE PRV ], [w] and [v] buttons are  
v
If the converted characters exceed the maximum number of  
input characters, a message will appear on the screen.  
Select “OK” and press the [OK] button to delete the excess  
characters and to input the remaining ones.  
Select “RETURN” and press the [OK] button to restore the  
unconfirmed characters.  
displayed.  
E Operation guide 2  
[ J / K / H / I], [OK], [RETURN], [OPTION], [BLUE], [RED],  
[GREEN] and [YELLOW] buttons are displayed.  
F Character input keyboard  
v
No more characters can be input if the maximum character  
limit has been reached.  
A character input keyboard appears during input of symbol.  
You can enter characters by selecting them accordingly from  
the keyboard.  
Character List  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
[*]  
.
a
d
g
j
,
!
A
D
T
J
1
B
E
G
K
N
P
U
W
_
-
(
ä
è
I
)
æ
é
ì
@
å
ê
í
/
à
ë
î
:
á
ð
ï
_
â
È
Ì
?
c
f
b
C
F
H
L
ã
É
Í
ç
Ê
Î
Æ
Ð
4
Ç
2
Ä
Ë
Ï
Å
À
Ô
;
Á
Õ
<
Â
Ñ
=
Ã
6
>
e
.
3
h
k
n
q
u
x
.
i
£
ö
R
ù
Y
5
ø
S
ú
Z
!
l
m
p
t
M
s
O
Q
V
X
/
ò
ÿ
û
ý
?
ó
ß
ü
þ
~
ô
$
Ù
Ý
(
õ
7
Ú
Þ
)
ñ
Ö
Ü
#
Ø
8
Ò
Ó
o
r
T
z
Û
9
*
v
y
@
-
w
0
,
*1  
[
-
:
+
,
^
$
>
%
&
]
'
`
{
|
}
*1  
.
~
!
?
.
*1: Single-byte space  
*2: Press the [#] button to return to the previous input character.  
59  
Editing  
5
Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
The selected titles and groups are now grouped together.  
Grouping  
Multiple titles stored on the HDD can be combined into a  
group.  
v
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
Memo:  
2CIG  
v
Only video data stored on the HDD can be grouped.  
)4172  
#..  
)4172  
6*'ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ6+6.'5ꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ)4172'&ꢂ61)'6*'4  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ/1&+(;ꢂ6*'ꢂ)4172ꢂ0#/'ꢂ(41/  
̌'&+6ꢂ+0(1̍ꢂ70&'4ꢂ6*'ꢂ126+10ꢂ/'07  
Grouping  
)4172  
$#%-  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
1-  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
2
Select the titles or groups to be grouped, and  
press the [MARK] button  
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected titles/groups.  
All titles and groups with the check mark will be grouped  
together.  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
v
Memo:  
v
To cancel grouping, select “BACK” and press the [OK]  
button.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
grouping and return to the initial screen.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
Ungrouping  
)4172  
#..  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
2
Select the group to ungroup, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
A pop-up option list appears.  
v
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
3
Select “UNGROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
An ungroup confirmation screen appears.  
.
v
3
Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control  
unit  
A pop-up option list appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+105  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
v
$#%-  
2.#;  
4
Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
A grouping confirmation screen appears.  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
v
001  
002  
003  
004  
70)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
VKVNG  
126+105  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
005  
006  
007  
008  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
)4172  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
4'6740  
.
'&+6ꢀ+0(1  
16*'45  
Memo:  
v
You cannot ungroup multiple groups at the same time.  
When multiple groups are selected, the “UNGROUP” item  
does not appear in the option list.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
60  
Editing  
4
3
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
All titles within the selected group are ungrouped.  
Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control  
unit  
A pop-up option list appears.  
v
v
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4
Select “DO NOT GROUP”, and press the [OK]  
button  
A confirmation screen for group exclusion appears.  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
v
)4172  
#..  
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
The selected titles are now excluded from the group.  
70)4172  
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ)4172ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ70)4172'&  
70)4172!  
v
;'5  
01  
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
.
6*'ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ6+6.'ꢃ5ꢄꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ4'/18'&ꢂ(41/ꢂ6*+5ꢂ)4172  
4'/18'ꢂ(41/ꢂ)4172!  
Memo:  
;'5  
01  
v
To cancel ungrouping, select “NO” and press the [OK]  
button.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
ungrouping and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
Memo:  
Excluding from a group  
v
To cancel, select “NO” and press the [OK] button.  
You can select titles and exclude them from a group.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
group exclusion and return to the initial screen.  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
2
Select the titles to exclude from the group, and  
press the [MARK] button  
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected titles/groups.  
v
All titles with the check mark will be excluded from the  
group.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
)4172  
#..  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
61  
Editing  
Changing the Title/Group  
Name  
Deleting a Title/Group  
Titles/groups can be deleted. When you delete a group, all  
titles contained within the group are deleted.  
The saved title/group name can be changed as follows.  
Memo:  
Memo:  
v
When a title/group is deleted from the HDD, BD-RE, or  
v
A title/group name can be added to video data stored on  
DVD-RW, the remaining space on the media increases  
according to the size of the deleted title/group.  
Deleting a title/group from a BD-R or DVD-R does not  
increase the amount of available space on the disc.  
the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, or DVD-R, and the  
name can be changed.  
v
Video data stored on a DVD-RW or DVD-R in the Video  
mode cannot be changed.  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
2
Select the titles/groups to delete, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
2
Select the title/group for which the name is to be  
changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
v
A pop-up option list appears.  
v
A pop-up option list appears.  
3
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
v
A confirmation screen for title/group deletion appears.  
v
An information editing screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+105  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
$#%-  
2+%674'  
2.#;  
$#%-  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
001  
002  
003  
004  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
VKVNG  
16*'45  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
005  
006  
007  
008  
VKVNG  
005  
006  
007  
008  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
.
4'6740  
.
4
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
The selected titles/groups are deleted.  
4
Select “MODIFY TITLE NAME” or “MODIFY  
GROUP NAME”, and press the [OK] button  
A title/group name modifying screen appears.  
v
v
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
)4172  
#..  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
001  
&'.'6'  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&'.'6'!  
001  
0
004  
VKVNG  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
&'.'6'  
$#%-  
005  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
005  
0
008  
2416'%6
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
Memo:  
v
To cancel the title/group deletion operation, select “BACK”  
and press the [OK] button.  
5
Modify the title/group name  
The modified title/group name is now saved.  
v
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
the deletion operation and return to the initial screen.  
Memo:  
v
For details on the method of character input, refer to  
“Entering Characters” (A page 59) .  
62  
Editing  
4
Select “PROTECT”, and press the [OK] button  
If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation  
screen for title protection will appear.  
Turning On Title/Group  
Protection  
v
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
Titles/groups can be protected.  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
Editing and deletion cannot be performed on protected titles/  
groups.  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
v
Title/group protection can be turned on for video data  
2416'%6  
stored on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and  
DVD-RW (VR).  
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ2416'%6'&  
&1ꢄ;17ꢄ9#06ꢄ61ꢄ5'6ꢄ2416'%6+10!  
;'5  
01  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
2
Select the titles/groups to be protected, and  
press the [OPTION] button  
A pop-up option list appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
v
v
If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,  
“PROTECT” and “UNPROTECT” items will be displayed.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
5
Select “YES” or “PROTECT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
The selected titles/groups are now protected.  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
v
001  
002  
003  
004  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
Memo:  
v
All selected titles and groups will be protected when  
multiple titles or groups are selected.  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
005  
006  
007  
008  
v
v
To turn off the title/group protection, select “NO” and press  
the [OK] button.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to turn  
off the protection and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
An information editing screen appears.  
v
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
001  
0
004  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
005  
0
008  
2416'%6
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
63  
Editing  
4
Select “UNPROTECT”, and press the [OK] button  
If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation  
screen for turning off protection will appear.  
Turning Off Title/Group  
Protection  
Protection of a title/group can be turned off.  
Titles/groups can be edited and deleted after their protection  
is turned off.  
v
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
(4''ꢂ52#%' ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
v
Title/group protection can be turned off for video data  
702416'%6  
::ꢂ6+6.'5ꢂ*#8'ꢂ$''0ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ61ꢂ4'/18'ꢂ6*'ꢂ2416'%6+10  
stored on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and  
DVD-RW (VR).  
;'5  
01  
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
v
2
Select the titles/groups to turn off protection for,  
and press the [OPTION] button  
A pop-up option list appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
v
v
If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,  
“UNPROTECT” and “PROTECT” items will be displayed.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
Protection of the selected titles/groups is now turned off.  
$#%-  
v
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
Memo:  
001  
002  
003  
004  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
v
Protection will be turned off from all selected titles and  
groups when multiple titles or groups are selected.  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
v
v
If you do not want to turn off the title/group protection,  
select “NO” and press the [OK] button.  
005  
006  
007  
008  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
protection removal and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
An information editing screen appears.  
v
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
001  
0
004  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
005  
0
008  
702416'%6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
64  
Editing  
5
Edit the playlist accordingly by selecting  
chapters from the source title according to your  
preference  
Edit the playlist.  
For details, refer to “Editing the playlist”.  
Creating a Playlist  
A playlist can be created from the video titles on the HDD.  
v
v
Playlists can only be created for titles that are stored on the  
HDD.  
Playlist  
: Enables you to create a program by selecting  
chapters from a specific title and editing their  
playback sequence.  
2.#;.+56ꢃ'&+6  
5#8'ꢃ2.#;.+56  
'&+6ꢃ2.#;.+56  
5174%'ꢃ6+6.'  
2CIG  
2CIG  
Memo:  
v
The playlist created comes in handy during playback and  
dubbing to a disc.  
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ  
6#4)'6ꢃ2.#;.+56  
Creating a Playlist  
1
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ  
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢃ2)  
0':6ꢃ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
5#8'  
4'6740  
.
v
2
Select the title for which a playlist is to be  
created, and press the [OPTION] button  
6
Press the [YELLOW] button on the remote  
control unit  
A playlist is created.  
v
3
Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
The Edit menu screen appears.  
v
Editing the playlist  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
m
2+%674'  
Chapter insertion  
$#%-  
2.#;  
Select the chapter to insert from the thumbnails of  
the “SOURCE TITLE”, and press the [OK] button  
Select the position to insert the chapter from the  
“TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
m
005  
006  
007  
008  
Chapter deletion  
Select the chapter to delete from the thumbnails of  
the “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button  
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
m
Entering the playlist name  
4
Select “PLAYLIST EDIT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
The playlist edit screen appears.  
Select “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK]  
button.  
v
Enter a playlist name, and press the [OK] button  
Memo:  
v
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
For details on the method of character input, refer to  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
“Entering Characters”.  
2CIG  
Note:  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
v
Deleting the original title list will cause the playlist to be  
001  
0
004  
deleted as well.  
Editing the original title list, or changing the recording mode  
may cause the playlist to be deleted.  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
VKVNG  
005  
0
&+8+&'  
008  
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
65  
Editing  
4
Select “CHANGE”, and press the [OK] button  
The displayed still image now becomes the thumbnail  
image.  
Editing a Thumbnail  
v
Thumbnails (index images) can be changed to a still image  
according to your preference.  
5
Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button  
Doing so ends the editing of thumbnails.  
v
Memo:  
v
Thumbnails of titles stored on the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R,  
Memo:  
v
DVD-RW, and DVD-R can be edited.  
You can also display the thumbnail modification screen  
v
from the Playback Navigation screen.  
However, thumbnails of titles that are stored on an SD card  
or finalized disc cannot be edited.  
Select the title for which the thumbnail is to be  
changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
1
Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on  
the remote control unit  
An information editing screen appears.  
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
v
An information editing screen appears.  
v
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+105  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢁ6+/'  
2416'%6  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
005  
006  
007  
008  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
.
Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the [OK]  
2
Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the  
[OK] button  
A thumbnail modification screen appears.  
button  
v
A thumbnail modification screen appears.  
v
3
Play the video, and press the [W] button to stop  
at the scene you want to use as thumbnail  
display  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
001  
0
004  
/1&+(;ꢃ6*7/$0#+.  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ%*#0)'ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ6*7/$0#+.5  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ'&+6ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ61ꢃ8+'9ꢃ$;ꢃ%*#26'45  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
005  
0
008  
2416'%6
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ  
%*#0)'  
%10(+4/  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
6*7/$0#+.  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
+0(1ꢂ%144'%6  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
Memo:  
v
For details on how to play videos, refer to “Video Playback  
Operation” (A page 51) .  
66  
Editing  
Editing a chapter  
Editing a Chapter  
1
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
Creating a chapter mark for a saved title enables you to find a  
specific scene within the title.  
unit  
v
The Edit menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
2
Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
The title screen appears.  
v
All chapter editing functions can be performed on titles  
stored on the HDD.  
v
Titles stored on a BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), DVD-R  
(VR), or DVD-RW (VR) only allow chapters to be divided or  
combined.  
v
The chapters of titles that are stored on an SD card or  
finalized disc cannot be edited.  
v
Also, protected titles cannot be edited. To perform chapter  
'&+6  
edit of a title, turn off the protection.  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
For details on turning off protection of a title, refer to “Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection” (A page 64) .  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
Chapter edit functions  
v
Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)  
.
Divides a chapter by inserting a chapter mark.  
v
Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)  
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Combine chapters by deleting the chapter mark.  
Memo:  
v
v
The chapter edit screen can also be called up from the  
Chapter deletion  
Playback Navigation screen.  
Deletes a specified chapter.  
Select the title to perform chapter edit, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+105  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
005  
006  
007  
008  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.'6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
001  
0
004  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
VKVNG  
005  
0
&+8+&'  
008  
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
v
v
For details on how to play videos, refer to “Video Playback  
Operation” (A page 51) .  
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
67  
Editing  
m
Deleting a video chapter  
Select the chapter for which you want to delete  
the video from the chapter edit screen  
Editing a Chapter  
(Continued)  
1
2
Press the [DELETE] button on the remote control  
unit  
A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter appears.  
m
Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)  
1
Play the video, and press the [W] button to stop  
at the scene you want to add a chapter mark  
v
2
Press the [MARK] button on the remote control  
unit  
A chapter mark is inserted into the paused scene.  
%%**##2266''44'&'+&6+6  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
v
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
%**##2266''44'&'+&6+6  
6*'ꢀ52'%+(+'&ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ&'.'6'&  
&'.'6'&ꢀ&#6#ꢀ%#0016ꢀ$'ꢀ4'5614'&  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
&'.'6'  
%#0%'.  
%10(+4/  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
4'6740  
.
3
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
The selected video chapter is deleted.  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
v
':+6  
'&+6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
4'6740  
.
Note:  
v
Videos cannot be restored once they are deleted.  
Memo:  
v
Deletion of the video may fail if the length of the chapter is  
too short.  
v
The chapter is now divided into two parts at the position of  
the chapter mark.  
m
Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)  
Chapter options  
Pressing the [OPTION] button on the remote control when the  
Chapter Edit screen is displayed enables you to perform the  
following editing operations.  
1
Play the video, and press the [W] and [ H / I ]  
buttons to display the scene for which you want  
to delete the chapter mark  
2
Press the [MARK] button on the remote control  
unit  
A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter mark  
appears.  
m
Combining with previous chapter  
Combines the selected chapter with the previous chapter.  
v
v
Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/PREV CH”,  
and press the [OK] button  
Combines chapters.  
v
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
m
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
Combining with next chapter  
Combines the selected chapter with the next chapter.  
v
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/NEXT CH”,  
%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-ꢀ#.4'#&;ꢀ':+565ꢁ  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&'.'6'ꢀ6*'  
':+56+0)ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-!  
and press the [OK] button  
v
Combines chapters.  
;'5  
01  
m
Combining all chapters  
Combines all chapters.  
v
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
Select “COMB. ALL CHAP.”, and press the [OK]  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
4'6740  
button  
.
v
A confirmation screen for combining all the chapters is  
3
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
The chapter mark is deleted from the selected scene.  
displayed.  
v
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
Combines all the chapters.  
v
Memo:  
v
The chapters before and after the position of the chapter  
mark are now combined.  
v
Pressing the [T / S] button displays the next/previous  
page.  
68  
Editing  
6
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
A confirmation screen for performing dividing appears.  
Dividing  
v
You can select a saved title and divide it into two titles.  
&+8+&'  
Memo:  
v
Dividing can only be applied to titles stored on the HDD.  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
v
Titles that are protected cannot be divided. To divide a title,  
turn off the protection.  
For details on turning off the title protection, refer to “Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection” (A page 64) .  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
':'%76'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
Dividing  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
1
5'.'%6  
':+6  
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
unit  
The Edit menu screen appears.  
1-  
4'6740  
'&+6  
126+10  
.
v
7
Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
2
Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
The title screen appears.  
v
Dividing starts.  
v
&+8+&'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
'&+6  
&+8+&'  
70#$.'ꢀ61ꢀ4'5614'ꢀ6*'ꢀ14+)+0#.ꢀ&#6#ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ+5ꢀ&+8+&'&ꢁ  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&+8+&'!  
&+8+&'  
%#0%'.  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
'&+6  
1-  
4'6740  
126+10  
.
.
3
4
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Play the video, and press the [W] button at the  
scene where you want to perform dividing  
5
Select “DIVIDING POINT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
&+8+&'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
':'%76'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
.
Memo:  
v
For details on how to play videos, refer to “Video Playback  
Operation” (A page 51) .  
v
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
69  
Editing  
Dividing (Continued)  
Delete Scenes  
Unwanted scenes of a saved title can be deleted.  
Doing so helps to increase the free space on the disc.  
Memo:  
v
To cancel the dividing operation, select “CANCEL” and  
press the [OK] button.  
Memo:  
v
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
Deleting scenes can only be applied to titles stored on the  
the divide operation and return to the initial screen.  
HDD.  
v
v
The dividing edit screen can also be called up from the  
Titles that are protected cannot be deleted. To enable  
Playback Navigation screen.  
scene delete of a title, turn off the protection.  
Select the titles to divide, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
For details on turning off the title protection, refer to “Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection” (A page 64) .  
v
Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
HD content for which the delete scene operation has been  
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless  
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
For details, refer to “Mode conversion” (A page 73) .  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
002  
003  
004  
Delete Scenes  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
1
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
unit  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
005  
006  
007  
008  
v
The Edit menu screen appears.  
2
Select “DELETE SCENE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
Displays the Title Display screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
v
.
Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
'&+6  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
001  
0
004  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
VKVNG  
005  
0
&+8+&'  
008  
.
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
126+10  
4'6740  
.
3
4
Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Edit the delete scene section  
Follow the steps below to edit the section for which delete  
scene is to be applied.  
70  
Editing  
5
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
A confirmation screen for performing scene delete appears.  
Play the video, and press the [W] button at the point  
where you want to start the delete operation  
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
v
6
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
Scene deletion starts.  
v
&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5  
56#46  
'0&  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ  
0':6  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
':'%76'  
6*'ꢃ52'%+(+'&ꢃ5'%6+10ꢃꢄ::ꢃ5')/'06ꢄ5ꢅꢅꢃ9+..ꢃ$'ꢃ&'.'6'&  
':'%76'  
56#46  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
'0&  
- : -- : --  
- : -- : --  
'0&  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
001  
1-  
4'6740  
0 : 00 : 09  
.
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
'&+6  
.
Play the video, and press the [W] button at the point  
where you want to end the delete operation  
Select “END”, and press the [OK] button  
Memo:  
v
To cancel the delete scene operation, select “CANCEL”  
and press the [OK] button.  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
delete scene and return to the initial screen.  
56#46  
'0&  
0':6  
':'%76'  
56#46  
'0&  
001  
0 : 00 : 03  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
.
To continue specifying other sections to delete,  
select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'  
;17ꢄ%#0ꢄ&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
56#46  
'0&  
0':6  
':'%76'  
56#46  
'0&  
001  
0 : 00 : 03  
001  
1-  
4'6740  
0 : 00 : 17  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
'&+6  
.
Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to specify the sections to delete  
Memo:  
v
For details on how to play videos, refer to “Video Playback  
Operation” (A page 51) .  
v
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
71  
Editing  
Changing the Disc Name  
Changing the Shooting  
Date/Time  
The name of a BD or DVD disc can be changed as follows.  
1
Set the BD or DVD for which the disc name is to  
be changed on the disc tray  
The date/time of the stored video can be changed as follows.  
v
The shooting date/time of videos stored on the HDD can be  
changed.  
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the  
remote control unit  
1
Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on  
the remote control unit  
v
The Media Management menu screen appears.  
v
An information correct screen appears.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢁ6+/'  
2416'%6  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
.
.
3
Select “RENAME DISC” under “BD/DVD”, and  
press the [OK] button  
A disc name modification screen appears.  
2
Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and  
press the [OK] button  
A thumbnail screen appears.  
v
v
4'0#/'ꢎ&+5%  
3
Select the title for which the shooting date/time  
is to be changed, and press the [OK] button  
The screen for changing the shooting date/time appears.  
2.'#5'ꢎ4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ&+5%  
v
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ  
IJKꢅ  
CDEꢄ  
LMNꢆ  
FGHꢍ  
OPQꢇ  
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ248  
4
Change the shooting date/time  
Perform the following steps to change the shooting date/  
time.  
v
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ0':6  
RSTUꢈ  
VWXꢉ  
YZ[\ꢌ  
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'  
%.'#4  
6+6.' ꢄ6*7/$0#+.ꢅ  
+0(1ꢀꢁ%144'%6  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢂꢃꢂ  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
2CIG  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
%10(+4/  
/'&+#ꢎ/#0#)'  
)4172  
#..  
.
%*#0)'ꢁ5*116+0)ꢁ&#6'ꢉ6+/'  
;'#4  
/106*ꢉ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢆꢆꢇ  
,#0ꢉꢆꢊ  
ꢃꢈꢂꢂ  
4
Modifying the Disc Name  
The new disc name is now saved.  
v
'06'4  
Memo:  
v
For details on the method of character input, refer to  
“Entering Characters” (A page 59) .  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢁ2)  
0':6ꢁ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
+0(1ꢀꢁ%144'%6  
4'6740  
.
Use the [ J ] and [ K ] buttons to move the cursor to  
the item you want to change  
Press the [OK] button to display the pop-up screen  
Use the [ J ] and [ K ] buttons to select a desired  
value  
Press the [OK] button to choose the value  
Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change settings for any  
desired items  
72  
Editing  
5
Select “ENTER”, and press the [OK] button  
The modified shooting date/time is saved.  
Mode conversion  
v
Memo:  
You can convert HD quality video titles saved on the HDD if  
they are recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN, AL, or AE mode.  
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
the shooting date/time modification and return to the initial  
screen.  
Seamless  
conversion  
: Seamless conversion can be performed to  
enable smooth playback of joined scenes  
after dubbing to a BD. (Titles recorded in  
the DR recording mode h seamless)  
v
v
The shooting date/time modification will not be reflected on  
a title that was dubbed.  
Pressing the [OPTION] button in the playback navigation  
screen instead of the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button  
will also display the shooting date/time edit screen.  
Recording  
mode  
conversion  
: Enables conversion of recording mode.  
(Titles recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN,  
AL, or AE mode hAF/AN/AL/AE/XP/SP/LP/  
EP)  
Select the title for which the shooting date/time is to  
be changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
Memo:  
v
As seamless conversion does not re-encode video and  
audio, there is no deterioration in the image quality.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
v
v
v
126+105  
Re-encoding is performed during recording mode  
conversion.  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
Only titles that are recorded in the DR mode enable  
conversion to the XP/SP/LP/EP mode.  
001  
002  
003  
004  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
To apply “MODE CHANGE” after turning off the power,  
select “AFTER POWER OFF” for “START METHOD” under  
the “MODE CHANGE”.  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
005  
006  
007  
008  
Note:  
v
When seamless conversion is performed, the chapters  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
(excluding joints of scenes) will be combined. To divide the  
chapters, insert chapter marks after seamless conversion.  
For details on dividing the chapters, refer to “Chapter mark  
insertion (divide chapter)” (A page 68) .  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
.
Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and press  
the [OK] button  
1
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
3
Select “MODE CHANGE” from the Option menu,  
and press the [OK] button  
The “MODE CHANGE” screen appears.  
001  
0
004  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
v
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
005  
0
008  
2416'%6
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
ꢀꢁꢀ  
4'/#+0  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
)4172  
#..  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
/1&'ꢄ%*#0)'  
/1&'  
56#46ꢄ/'6*1&  
5'#/.'55  
+//'&+#6'  
%10(+4/  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
.
4
5
Select a recording mode from “MODE CHANGE”,  
and press the [OK] button  
Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button  
73  
Settings Menu  
DOWN MIX ....................................................... (A page 78)  
DIGITAL OUT ................................................... (A page 78)  
PCM DOWN SAMPLING .............................. (A page 78)  
Dolby Digital .................................................. (A page 78)  
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD ............................ (A page 78)  
DTS ............................................................... (A page 78)  
DTS-HD ........................................................ (A page 79)  
AAC ............................................................... (A page 79)  
DV IN AUDIO SETTING ................................... (A page 79)  
BD MIX SOUND ............................................... (A page 79)  
DISPLAY .............................................................. (A page 79)  
ON SCREEN GUIDE ........................................ (A page 79)  
BLUE BACK ..................................................... (A page 79)  
SCREEN SAVER ............................................. (A page 79)  
OSD LANGUAGE ............................................. (A page 79)  
CONNECTION ..................................................... (A page 80)  
MONITOR TYPE .............................................. (A page 80)  
HDMI CONNECTION ....................................... (A page 80)  
VIDEO PRIORITY MODE ............................. (A page 80)  
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION ..................... (A page 80)  
BD-VIDEO 24p OUT ..................................... (A page 80)  
x.v.Color ........................................................ (A page 81)  
Deep Color .................................................... (A page 81)  
HDMI RGB OUTPUT RANGE ....................... (A page 81)  
HDMI --> DVI COLOR ................................... (A page 81)  
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT ................................. (A page 81)  
HDMI-CEC ........................................................ (A page 81)  
COMPONENT OUTPUT ................................... (A page 81)  
VIDEO INPUT SETTING .................................. (A page 81)  
Memo:  
Changing Settings of this  
Unit  
Settings changed in the Settings Menu screen are stored on  
this unit even when its power is turned off.  
Displaying the Settings Menu  
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
v
The Settings Menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
v
When playback is in progress, pressing the button stops it  
and displays the Settings Menu screen.  
v
The cursor position appears at the position when the  
screen was last closed.  
Setting Menu List  
The following items can be set. Items that cannot be set  
cannot be selected.  
SETUP ................................................................. (A page 75)  
AUTO POWER (OFF) ....................................... (A page 75)  
REMOTE CONTROL CODE ............................ (A page 75)  
CLOCK SET/DISPLAY ..................................... (A page 75)  
CLOCK SET .................................................. (A page 75)  
DATE DISPLAY ............................................ (A page 75)  
TIME DISPLAY CHOICE .............................. (A page 75)  
PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS ..................... (A page 75)  
DIMMER (POWER ON) ................................ (A page 75)  
DIMMER (POWER OFF) .............................. (A page 76)  
QUICK STARTUP ............................................ (A page 76)  
BUZZER OUTPUT ........................................... (A page 76)  
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR TONE ......... (A page 76)  
ALERT/WARNING TONE ............................. (A page 76)  
DEFAULT SETTING ......................................... (A page 76)  
PLAYBACK SETTING .......................................... (A page 76)  
BD-/DVD-VIDEO PB SETTING ........................ (A page 76)  
BD-VIDEO RATINGS .................................... (A page 76)  
COUNTRY CODE ......................................... (A page 76)  
AUDIO LANGUAGE ...................................... (A page 76)  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE ................................ (A page 76)  
MENU LANGUAGE ...................................... (A page 76)  
RESUME .......................................................... (A page 77)  
STILL MODE .................................................... (A page 77)  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK .................................. (A page 77)  
RECORD .............................................................. (A page 77)  
XP MODE RECORDING AUDIO ...................... (A page 77)  
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING .................................. (A page 77)  
VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT ......... (A page 77)  
DISC RECORDING AUDIO .......................... (A page 78)  
AUDIO .................................................................. (A page 78)  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL ......................... (A page 78)  
v
The highlighted value is the default setting.  
74  
Settings Menu  
v
CLOCK SET  
Setup  
Sets the current date and time.  
Memo:  
v
For details on the setting procedures, refer to “Setting the  
5'672  
date/time” (A page 20) .  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
1((  
v
DATE DISPLAY  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
For setting the date (year, month, and day) display format.  
Setting Values Description  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
YEAR.MONTH.DAY Displays the date in the year/month/  
day order.  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
MONTH.DAY.YEAR Displays the date in the month/day/  
year order.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
.
DAY.MONTH.YEAR Displays the date in the day/month/  
year order.  
m
AUTO POWER (OFF)  
You can specify a time for the power of the unit to turn off  
automatically when it is not being operated.  
v
TIME DISPLAY CHOICE  
For setting the time display format.  
Setting Values  
Description  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
Power does not turn off automatically.  
Turns off power after two hours.  
Turns off power after six hours.  
12H  
24H  
Displays the time in AM/PM format.  
Displays the time in 24-hour format.  
2 HOURS  
6 HOURS  
m
PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS  
m
REMOTE CONTROL CODE  
The brightness of the display window can be specified using  
the “DIMMER (POWER ON)”, and “DIMMER (POWER OFF)”  
control items.  
For remote control units compliant with JVC’s products,  
different remote control codes can be specified for those that  
are used with this unit.  
v
DIMMER (POWER ON)  
For setting the brightness of the display window when the  
power is turned "On".  
Setting Values  
Description  
REMOTE CONTROL 1 Sets remote control code to 1.  
REMOTE CONTROL 2 Sets remote control code to 2.  
REMOTE CONTROL 3 Sets remote control code to 3.  
REMOTE CONTROL 4 Sets remote control code to 4.  
Setting Values Description  
BRIGHT  
DIMMED1  
DIMMED2  
DIMMED3  
OFF  
Bright  
Slightly dim  
Dim  
m
CLOCK SET/DISPLAY  
The current date/time and the display format on the screen  
can be specified using the “CLOCK SET”, “DATE DISPLAY”,  
and “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE” items.  
Dimmer  
Off  
75  
Settings Menu  
v
DIMMER (POWER OFF)  
Playback Setting  
For turning on/off the light of the display window when the  
power is turned "Off".  
Setting Values  
Description  
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)  
$&ꢁꢂ&8&ꢁ8+&'1ꢀ2$ꢀ5'66+0)  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off the light.  
Turns on the light.  
4'57/'  
10  
#761  
10  
56+..ꢀ/1&'  
5'#/.'55ꢀ2.#;$#%-  
m
QUICK STARTUP  
The quick startup setting can be specified as follows.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
OFF  
Starts up in the normal way.  
4'6740  
.
ON  
Operation is speedily enabled after turning  
on the power. (Quick start)  
m
BD-/DVD-VIDEO PB SETTING  
BD-Video and DVD-Video playback settings can be specified  
using the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS”, “COUNTRY CODE”,  
“AUDIO LANGUAGE”, “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”, and “MENU  
LANGUAGE” items.  
Memo:  
v
Setting to “ON” increases power consumption while the unit  
is in the standby mode.  
v
BD-VIDEO RATINGS  
m
BUZZER OUTPUT  
For setting the lower age limit for BD-Video ratings.  
The buzzer setting can be specified as follows.  
Setting Values  
Description  
v
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR TONE  
NO LIMIT  
All BD-Videos can be viewed.  
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when the remote  
control sensor receives signals.  
254YEAR(S)-  
0YEAR(S)  
BD-Videos that are subject to the age  
limit cannot be viewed.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Memo:  
OFF  
Buzzer does not sound when the remote  
control sensor receives signals.  
v
In order to set the restrictions, password (four-digit  
number) registration is required.  
v
The password status becomes unregistered if the  
restriction setting is disabled. A new password can be  
registered after setting the age limit again.  
ON  
Sounds the buzzer when the remote control  
sensor receives signals.  
v
ALERT/WARNING TONE  
v
v
It is recommended that you note down the password in  
case it is lost or forgotten.  
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when an operation is  
completed or when a warning message appears.  
COUNTRY CODE  
Setting Values  
Description  
For setting the country code.  
OFF  
ON  
Buzzer does not sound.  
Sounds the buzzer.  
For details on the country codes, refer to the “Country Code  
List” (A page 96) .  
Memo:  
v
If the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS” setting is specified, you will  
m
DEFAULT SETTING  
be required to enter the password registered for the “BD-  
VIDEO RATINGS” in order to change the “COUNTRY  
CODE”.  
Restores the setting values on the setting screen to their  
factory default values.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
v
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
For setting the audio sound when playing back BD-Videos  
or DVD-Videos.  
YES  
Restores the factory default values.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the “Language  
Code List” (A page 94) .  
NO  
Returns to the initial screen without  
resetting the values.  
v
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
Memo:  
For setting the subtitle language when playing back BD-  
Videos or DVD-Videos.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the “Language  
Code List” (A page 94) .  
v
“BD-VIDEO RATINGS” and “COUNTRY CODE” settings  
cannot be reset once they have been specified.  
v
MENU LANGUAGE  
For setting the menu language when playing back BD-  
Videos or DVD-Videos.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the “Language  
Code List” (A page 94) .  
76  
Settings Menu  
m
Record  
RESUME  
The stop position can be stored when playback of a BD-  
Video, DVD-Video, BDMV, AVCHD, finalized discs, or SD  
card is stopped halfway.  
4'%14&  
Setting Values  
Description  
&QND[ꢀ&KIKVCN  
:2ꢀ/1&'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ#7&+1  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
OFF  
ON  
Resume information is not stored.  
Stores resume information.  
Memo:  
v
Resume information is stored at all times for other discs as  
well as the HDD regardless of this setting.  
v
When a HDD title is selected using Playback Navigation, it  
is played back from the beginning.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
.
v
Some discs do not allow playback from the resume point.  
m
XP MODE RECORDING AUDIO  
m
STILL MODE  
For changing the settings of audio mode during recording in  
the XP mode.  
For setting the method for displaying paused images during  
playback of the HDD or a disc.  
Setting Values  
Dolby Digital  
LPCM  
Description  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Records in “Dolby Digital”.  
Records in “LPCM”.  
AUTO  
Automatic control.  
FIELD  
Use this setting for moving images or when  
there is blurring in the “AUTO” mode.  
m
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING  
Items under “VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT” and  
“DISC RECORDING AUDIO” can be set to support high-  
speed dubbing.  
FRAME  
Use this setting when detailed patterns or  
designs are not clear in the “AUTO” mode.  
v
VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT  
Memo:  
For setting the aspect ratio during recording.  
v
This setting is disabled for programs in the DR mode and  
during playback of AVCHD videos.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
m
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK  
AUTO  
Performs recording in the aspect ratio  
setting when recording starts.  
For setting the method for playing back partially erased  
scenes.  
4:3  
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 16:9.  
Setting Values  
Description  
16:9  
OFF  
ON  
Plays back with high accuracy.  
Plays back smoothly.  
Memo:  
v
High-speed dubbing to a DVD-Video disc cannot be  
performed when there are different aspect ratios in a title.  
In this case, fix the aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9. This setting  
remains valid during re-encode dubbing.  
Memo:  
v
SD picture quality is retained during re-encode dubbing.  
v
For joints of scenes that are 15 seconds or shorter,  
seamless playback may fail even when it is set to “ON”.  
The same applies during re-encode dubbing in the SD  
picture quality.  
For details on high-speed dubbing and re-encode dubbing,  
refer to the “Dubbing chart” (A page 24) .  
77  
Settings Menu  
v
DISC RECORDING AUDIO  
m
DIGITAL OUT  
For changing the settings of audio to be recorded to the disc  
when in the AF, AN, AE or AL mode.  
Set this item according to the device connected to the digital  
audio output terminal (optical digital).  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
v
PCM DOWN SAMPLING  
For specifying settings on sampling frequency conversion.  
AUTO  
Records “Stereo”, “Surround” or “Dual  
broadcast” audio sounds as they are.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
FIXED  
Records “Stereo” and “Surround” sounds in  
“Stereo”. “Dual broadcast” audio sounds are  
recorded as they are.  
OFF  
Sampling frequency is not converted.  
ON  
Audio recorded at a sampling frequency of  
96 kHz or 88.2 kHz is converted to 48 kHz  
and 44.1 kHz respectively.  
Memo:  
v
Surround sounds of a title become stereo sounds when re-  
encode dubbing is performed.  
Memo:  
v
Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”  
mode for some discs.  
Audio  
v
Dolby Digital  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
#7&+1  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is able to decode “Dolby  
Digital”.  
&;0#/+%ꢀ4#0)'ꢀ%10641.  
&190ꢀ/+:  
10  
56'4'1  
&+)+6#.ꢀ176  
&8ꢀ+0ꢀ#7&+1ꢀ5'66+0)  
$&ꢀ/+:ꢀ5170&  
56'4'1ꢀꢁ  
10  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is unable to decode “Dolby  
Digital”.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
v
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
.
m
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
For setting the dynamic range compression ratio (ratio  
between the maximum and minimum volume) during Dolby  
Digital playback.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is able to decode “Dolby  
Digital Plus/TrueHD”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Perform compression only for Dolby  
TrueHD.  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is unable to decode “Dolby  
Digital Plus/TrueHD”.  
OFF  
ON  
Not compressed.  
Perform maximum compression.  
v
Memo:  
DTS  
v
Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”  
mode for some discs.  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
v
v
Performing compression allows even the slightest sound to  
be heard clearly.  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is able to decode “DTS”.  
There may be differences in the effect depending on the  
disc used.  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is unable to decode “DTS”.  
m
DOWN MIX  
For setting whether to output analog audio.  
Setting Values  
Description  
STEREO  
Use this setting when connecting an  
audio amplifier or TV.  
DOLBY  
SURROUND  
Use this setting when connecting an  
amplifier that supports Dolby  
Surround.  
78  
Settings Menu  
v
DTS-HD  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Display  
Setting Values  
Description  
&+52.#;  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is able to decode “DTS-HD”.  
10ꢀ5%4''0ꢀ)7+&'  
$.7'ꢀ$#%-  
#761  
10  
5%4''0ꢀ5#8'4  
15&ꢀ.#0)7#)'  
10  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
'0).+5*  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “DTS-HD”.  
v
AAC  
5'.'%6  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
5'672  
.
Setting Values  
Description  
m
ON SCREEN GUIDE  
For displaying operation details.  
Setting Values  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is able to decode “AAC”.  
Description  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a  
device that is unable to decode “AAC”.  
AUTO  
Appears for five seconds when an  
operation is performed.  
OFF  
Not displayed.  
Memo:  
v
Audio sound may not be properly played back if the audio  
equipment in use does not support “BITSTREAM” output.  
In this case, set to “PCM”.  
m
BLUE BACK  
For setting the screen display when there is no signal input.  
Setting Values  
Description  
m
DV IN AUDIO SETTING  
OFF  
ON  
Displays screen as it is.  
For changing the audio recording settings during DV input.  
Switches display to a blue screen.  
Setting Values  
Description  
m
STEREO 1  
Records the audio sound during video  
recording (L1, R1).  
SCREEN SAVER  
For setting whether to use a screensaver.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
STEREO 2  
MIX  
Records audio sound that is added later  
(L2, R2), such as during editing.  
OFF  
ON  
Screen saver is not used.  
Records “STEREO 1” and “STEREO 2”  
sounds.  
Screen saver is used. Switches to the burn-  
in prevention screen when the unit is not  
operated for more than five minutes.  
m
BD MIX SOUND  
For setting a mixture of BD video secondary audio and  
operation sounds output.  
m
OSD LANGUAGE  
For setting the language for messages displayed on-screen.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
Outputs main audio only.  
ON  
Outputs a mixture of BD video secondary  
audio and operation sounds during playback  
of BD-Videos that contain BD video  
secondary audio and menu operation  
sounds.  
Memo:  
v
Output is converted to Dolby Digital or DTS according to  
the main audio when the “DIGITAL OUT” item is set to  
“BITSTREAM”.  
79  
Settings Menu  
Connection  
v
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Automatically selects an appropriate  
resolution according to the connected  
device.  
%100'%6+10  
/10+614ꢀ6;2'  
*&/+ꢀ%100'%6+10  
*&/+ꢄ%'%  
1((  
%1/210'06ꢀ176276  
8+&'1ꢀ+0276ꢀ5'66+0)  
ꢁꢂꢃꢂK  
8+&'1  
480p  
1080i  
720p  
1080p  
Fixes the resolution at 480p.  
Fixes the resolution at 1080i.  
Fixes the resolution at 720p.  
Fixes the resolution at 1080p.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
Memo:  
.
v
When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at  
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though  
“720p” is shown on the display.  
m
MONITOR TYPE  
For setting the aspect ratio according to the connected  
monitor.  
v
Depending on the conditions (monitor type 16:9,resolution  
“720p” and above, aspect 4:3), some of the OSD display of  
the component output may be cut off. In this case, set  
“VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to “COMPONENT”.  
OSD of the [VIDEO OUT]/[S-VIDEO OUT] terminals may  
be cut off with the above conditions even when  
“COMPONENT” is selected. In this case, set the  
component resolution to “480p” or below, or set the monitor  
type to other settings except 16:9.  
Setting Values  
Description  
16:9  
Set to this value when connected to  
monitors with 16:9 aspect ratio.  
16:9FULL  
Choose this setting when a 16:9 monitor  
is connected to display images without  
the black borders.  
v
4:3 PAN&SCAN Set to this value when connecting to  
monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Plays back videos with the left and right  
edges trimmed off.  
BD-VIDEO 24p OUT  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
Outputs in the resolution set by “HDMI  
OUTPUT RESOLUTION”.  
4:3  
Set to this value when connecting to  
monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Plays back videos with a black band at  
the upper and lower ends.  
LETTERBOX  
ON  
Outputs 24p elements at 24p.  
Memo:  
v
24p playback is possible for commercially available BD-  
Videos or BDMVs that are recorded in 24p. Content other  
than BDMVs that is dubbed or recorded on this unit at 24p,  
as well as 24p content on SD cards are played back at 60p  
or 60i.  
m
HDMI CONNECTION  
VIDEO PRIORITY MODE  
Setting Values  
v
Description  
COMPONENT Set to this value for output at a resolution  
of “480p” or higher from the  
v
This is applicable for BD-ROM and DVD-Video titles.  
This is available when connected to a 24p compatible  
monitor.  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
v
v
HDMI  
Set to this value when priority is to be  
given to the “HDMI OUTPUT  
RESOLUTION” setting.  
Elements other than 24p ones are output at 60p.  
No video images will be output from the video, S-video and  
component outputs when the HDMI output resolution is at  
1080/24p.  
Memo:  
v
During data output from the [HDMI] terminal, setting to  
“COMPONENT” automatically outputs data in the  
“COMPONENT OUTPUT” setting. Setting to “HDMI”  
outputs data in the “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” setting.  
v
During data output from the [HDMI] and [COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT] terminals, setting to “COMPONENT”  
automatically outputs data in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT”  
setting. Setting to “HDMI” outputs data at the “480i”  
resolution from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
v
When there is no output from the [HDMI] terminal, data is  
automatically output in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT”  
setting from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
80  
Settings Menu  
v
x.v.Color  
m
HDMI-CEC  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
For setting the HDMI-CEC operation from the connected  
device.  
Setting Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Outputs x.v.Color information with HDMI  
when video images that include x.v.Color  
information are played back.  
OFF  
ON  
Disables HDMI-CEC.  
Enables HDMI-CEC.  
OFF  
This is applicable when an x.v.Color  
compatible monitor is connected.  
m
COMPONENT OUTPUT  
Memo:  
For setting the resolution of video output from the  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals.  
v
This is applicable when an x.v.Color compatible monitor is  
connected.  
Setting Values  
Description  
v
Deep Color  
480i  
Sets output to “480i”.  
Sets output to “480p”.  
Sets output to “720p”.  
Sets output to “1080i”.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
480p  
720p  
AUTO  
Set to this value when a “Deep Color” device  
is connected.  
1080i  
OFF  
Set to this value when the video image is  
distorted, or colors are unnatural.  
Memo:  
v
When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at  
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though  
“720p” is shown on the display.  
v
HDMI RGB OUTPUT RANGE  
Setting Values  
STANDARD  
ENHANCED  
Description  
v
v
v
This unit does not support component output at “1080p”. To  
output at “1080p”, do so via HDMI connection.  
Set to this value for standard uses.  
If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “HDMI”, the unit will  
output at “480i” regardless of the current setting.  
Set to this value when the black and  
white parts of the video image are not  
distinct.  
If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “COMPONENT”, or  
when a HDMI connection is used, DVD videos will be  
output at “480p” even if “720p” or “1080i” has been set.  
Memo:  
v
This is available when connected to a DVI device that only  
supports RGB input.  
v
The aspect ratio of video/S-video output changes according  
to the component output setting. As such, there may be  
cases where the aspect ratio of the video/S-video output is  
different from the predefined setting of the content.  
v
HDMI --> DVI COLOR  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
m
VIDEO INPUT SETTING  
Choose a setting according to the video terminal to be  
connected when an external analog input terminal is used.  
AUTO  
Value is set automatically according to the  
monitor.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
RGB FIX  
Use this setting when video images are not  
correctly displayed on the monitor.  
VIDEO  
Use this setting when connecting via the  
video (BNC) terminal.  
Memo:  
v
This is available when the “x.v.Color” setting is set to “OFF”.  
When the “x.v.Color” setting is set to “AUTO”, this setting will  
be set to “AUTO” automatically.  
S-VIDEO  
Use this setting when connecting via the  
S-video (black) terminal.  
v
v
Change this setting when no video image appears while  
connected to a DVI device.  
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
Use this setting if you do not want to send  
audio output from the HDMI cable.  
ON  
Use this setting to send audio output from  
the HDMI cable.  
81  
Others  
Locking the Disc Tray  
Turning on the Mode Lock  
By turning on the lock for the disc tray, the tray cannot be  
Turning on the mode lock disables all operations using the  
buttons on the unit and remote control, except for “Play” and  
“Record”.  
opened or closed using the [M] button.  
Memo:  
v
When the [M] button is pressed while the disc tray lock is  
Memo:  
v
turned on, a “LOCKED” message will appear on the display  
window of the unit for about three seconds.  
When a button that is disabled is pressed, a “LOCKED”  
message will appear on the display window of the unit for  
three seconds.  
Locking the disc tray  
Turning on the mode lock  
1
Press the [A] button on the unit to turn “Off”  
the power  
1
Press the [Z] button on the remote control for  
five seconds or longer when in the “Normal  
Recording”, “Stop”, or “Normal Playback” mode  
2
Press and hold the [o] button on this unit, then  
press the [M] button  
v
A “LOCKED” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned on.  
v
A “LOCKED” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is locked.  
.
Press the " " button for  
five seconds or longer  
Unlocking the disc tray  
1
Press the [A] button on the unit to turn “Off”  
the power  
.
2
Press and hold the [o] button on this unit, then  
press the [M] button  
v
An “UNLOCK” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is unlocked.  
Turning off the mode lock  
1
Press the [Z] button on the remote control for  
five seconds or longer when the mode lock is  
turned on  
An “UNLOCK” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned off.  
v
Last Function Memory  
When the power plug is disconnected from unit or when  
power failure occurs, your settings for the following functions  
are kept in the memory. These settings will resume when the  
unit is turned on again.  
v
Various setting menus (A Page 74 - 81)  
v
Deck selection: HDD/BD/SD  
v
Recording mode: XP, etc. (A page 28)  
v
Input selection: L-1/DV (A page 47)  
v
Repeat playback of the disc playback settings menu (A  
page 56)  
Kept for DVD-Video/AVCHD/BDMV and title/chapter only.  
82  
Others  
RS-232C Interface (only for  
SR-HD1500)  
Command Table  
only for SR-HD1500  
Lower Order  
Higher Order  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
Complete  
Error  
Cassette  
Out  
Not  
Target  
ACK  
NAK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Play  
Stop  
Still  
Clear  
Sense  
Chapter  
Title  
Sense  
7
8
Chapter  
Search  
Title  
Search  
Date  
Preset  
Clock  
Preset  
9
Finalize  
Cancel-  
Disc  
Disc  
Erase  
TOP  
MENU  
MENU  
NEXT PREV  
CHAPTER CHAPTER  
Setup  
SET  
UP  
DOWN  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
REW  
Next  
Title  
Prev  
Title  
Remote  
Data  
Finalization  
A
B
Standby  
On  
Standby  
Off  
Eject  
FF  
Fwd  
Field  
Step  
Rev  
Field  
Step  
Fwd Shtl  
Rev Shtl  
Select  
Preset  
Select  
Sense  
Date  
Data  
Sense  
Clock  
Data  
Sense  
C
D
Rec  
Status  
Sense  
Tc Data  
Sense  
CTL  
Data  
Sense  
JVC  
Status  
Sense  
E
F
Command  
Target  
Rec/Dub  
Request  
.
Mode  
: Non-synchronous  
Specifications  
Pin layout  
Character length : 8 bits  
v
Parity check  
Start bit  
: Odd  
: 1  
1
5
Stop bit  
: 1  
9
6
.
Data rate  
: 9600 bps  
v
Bit configuration  
PIN No. Signal  
Operation  
Transmit data  
Direction of signal  
This unit h PC  
Parity check  
2
3
5
TxD  
RxD Receive data  
This unit i PC  
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
GND Signal grounding  
Starting bit  
Stopping bit  
.
Memo:  
v
When using the Serial Command Connector, the cable to be used should be a RS-232C interface cable (straight type, 3 m or  
shorter).  
v
v
v
When using RS-232C, set “QUICK STARTUP” in the settings menu to “ON”.  
During command transmission, a minimum interval of About 50 milliseconds is required between each command.  
During command transmission, do not send the next command until the ACK (refer to “System Commands” (A page 90) ) or  
response (refer to “Response Commands” (A page 90) ) for each command is received.  
v
The recommended maximum waiting time for the ACK or response for each command is as follows.  
ACK  
: About 50 milliseconds  
: About 5 seconds  
Response  
83  
Others  
Command  
m
Operation Commands  
Commands for operating functions such as PLAY and REC on the BLU-RAY DISC & HDD RECORDER  
Command  
Description  
A1  
A3  
AB  
Power Off  
3A  
3F  
Plays the selected deck.  
Eject: Opens/Closes tray. (BD Deck only)  
Stops the selected deck. Resume will be  
cleared when this is pressed while in the Stop  
mode. Rec Request will be cleared.  
FF: Functions only during playback. Activates  
forward search.  
AC  
AD  
REW: Functions only during playback.  
Activates reverse search.  
4F  
56  
80  
Switches the selected deck to the Still mode.  
Clear: Clears the Error status.  
Functions as a key for advancing (FWD) a  
frame. When this command is received during  
still mode, the unit advances the still picture  
by one frame (or field) in the FWD direction.  
Searches the specified chapter and starts  
playback from the beginning.  
81  
Searches the specified title under “ORIGINAL”  
or in the “PLAY LIST” by its number and starts  
playback from the beginning.  
AE  
B5  
Functions as a key for reversing (REV) a  
frame. When this command is received during  
still mode, the unit reverses the still picture by  
one frame (or field) in the REV direction.  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
For setting the date.  
Fwd Shtl: Functions only during playback.  
Activates forward search.  
B5 h 30: STILL  
B5 h 31: FWD SLOW at a slow speed.  
B5 h 33: FWD SLOW at a fast speed.  
B5 h 35: 1x  
B5 h 36: FWD SEARCH at a fast speed.  
B5 h 37: FWD SEARCH at a faster speed.  
B5 h 38: FWD SEARCH at the fastest speed.  
For setting the time.  
Finalizes the disc. (BD Deck)  
Cancels disc finalization. (BD Deck)  
For erasing rewritable discs.  
Displays/Closes the top menu of a disc. (BD  
Deck)  
94  
95  
Displays/Closes the disc menu. (BD Deck)  
B6  
B8  
Rev Shtl: Functions only during playback.  
Activates reverse search.  
B6 h 30: STILL  
B6 h 31: REV SLOW at a slow speed.  
B6 h 33: REV SLOW at a fast speed.  
B6 h 36: REV SEARCH at a fast speed.  
B6 h 37: REV SEARCH at a faster speed.  
B6 h 38: REV SEARCH at the fastest speed.  
Advances to the next chapter. Functions like  
the T button on the remote control.  
96  
97  
Returns to the previous chapter. Functions  
like the S button on the remote control.  
Displays/Closes the Main Menu, Editing,  
Library Database Navigation or Dubbing  
screen.  
For setting the input/output, recording mode,  
audio language selection and subtitle  
selection.  
97 h 30: Closes the screen.  
97 h 31: Displays the Main Menu screen.  
97 h 32: Displays the Library Database  
Navigation screen.  
97 h 35: Displays the Editing screen.  
97 h 37: Displays the Dubbing screen.  
CA  
F0  
Rec: Starts recording at the selected deck  
when a Rec Request is received.  
Command Target:  
F0 h 34: For selecting HDD deck.  
F0 h 38: For selecting BD deck.  
F0 h 3C: For selecting SD deck.  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
Functions as a confirmation key.  
Functions as an up key.  
Functions as a down key.  
Functions as a right key.  
Functions as a left key.  
FA  
Rec Request: For issuing approval for  
recording. This can be cleared using STOP.  
Advances to the next title. Functions like the  
T button on the remote control.  
9E  
9F  
A0  
Returns to the previous title. Functions like the  
S button on the remote control.  
Issues the same codes as the wired remote  
control via RS-232C.  
Power On  
84  
Others  
80-8F  
80 : Chapter Search  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte  
Chapter Search  
Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
ASCII codes (30 - 39) 3*  
E.g. (012) 30  
3*  
31  
32  
E.g. : When searching the 12th chapter.  
81 : Title Search under “ORIGINAL”  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte  
Title Search (ORIGINAL) 30  
Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
ASCII codes (30 - 39)  
E.g. (345)  
30  
30  
3*  
3*  
33  
34  
35  
E.g. : When searching the 345th title, as indicated by the title number on the top right corner of the index, under “ORIGINAL”.  
81 : Title Search in “PLAY LIST”  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte  
Title Search (PLAY LIST) 38  
Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
ASCII codes (30 - 39)  
E.g. (028)  
38  
38  
3*  
3*  
30  
32  
38  
E.g. : When searching the 28th play list, as indicated by the play list number on the top right corner of the index, in the “PLAY  
LIST”.  
8E : Date Preset  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte 6th Byte  
Date Preset  
ASCII code (30 - 39) 3*  
E.g. (09.14.2009) 30  
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day (Ones) Yr (Tens) Yr (Ones)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
39  
31  
34  
30  
39  
E.g. : When setting the date to September 14 2009.  
8F : Clock Preset  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Clock Preset  
ASCII code (30 - 39) 3*  
E.g. (12:34:56) 31  
Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
E.g. : When setting the time to 12 hrs 34 min and 56 sec.  
85  
Others  
9F  
9F : Remote Data  
The remote control codes for controlling the wired remote controller via RS-232C is as shown in the following table. The codes  
apply to all three HDD, BD and SD deck unless otherwise stated.  
Code  
Items  
INPUT SELECT  
STOP  
Remarks  
81  
MENU  
BD/DVD Deck only  
01  
82  
CUSOR 90°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the up. (J)  
03  
84  
86  
CUSOR 180°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the left. (H)  
06  
F.F/SPEED+  
REW/SPEED-  
POWER ON/OFF  
PLAY  
07  
CUSOR 270°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the down. (K)  
0B  
0C  
0D  
14  
87  
8E  
8F  
90  
OPEN/CLOSE  
PROGRESSIVE  
TOP MENU  
MARK  
BD/DVD Deck only  
HDD/BD Deck only  
DVD Deck only  
PAUSE/STILL  
FWD SKIP  
REV SKIP  
HDD/DVD Deck only  
15  
96  
CM SKIP  
17  
AUDIO  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
REV FRAME  
-SLOW D  
1A  
1D  
Power Off  
Power On  
Use with “QUICK  
STARTUP” set to “ON”.  
Refer to “QUICK  
SHUTTLE-C  
SHUTTLE-B  
SHUTTLE-A  
SHUTTLE-2  
SHUTTLE-1  
-SLOW B  
STARTUP” (A page 76) .  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
31  
TEN KEY 1  
TEN KEY 2  
TEN KEY 3  
TEN KEY 4  
TEN KEY 5  
TEN KEY 6  
TEN KEY 7  
TEN KEY 8  
TEN KEY 9  
KEY Z  
-SLOW C  
+SLOW C  
+SLOW B  
SHUTTLE +1  
SHUTTLE +2  
SHUTTLE +A  
SHUTTLE +B  
SHUTTLE +C  
+SLOW D  
TEN KEY 0  
KEY #  
REC MODE (XP/SP/LP/  
EP…)  
ANGLE/LIVE CHECK  
ANGLE (BD/DVD Deck  
only)  
LIVE CHECK (HDD/BD  
Deck only)  
32  
34  
37  
3C  
3E  
44  
48  
80  
BD/DVD DECK  
DUBBING  
SET UP  
C4  
SUBTITLE DVD Deck  
only  
OK/ENTER  
CC REC  
ON SCREEN  
HDD DECK  
D4  
D5  
D7  
D9  
RETURN  
COLOR KEY BLUE  
COLOR KEY RED  
JOG-1/6  
MEDIA MANAGEMENT  
CUSOR 0°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the right. (I)  
86  
Others  
DA  
DB  
JOG +1/6  
JOG +1  
E2  
L1 COMPOSITE INPUT  
SELECT  
HDD Deck only  
E3  
E4  
E5  
PLAYBACK SETTING  
DELETE  
DC INSTANT REPLAY  
DD EDIT  
INFORMATION  
CORRECT  
DE  
DF  
E0  
E1  
COLOR KEY GREEN  
COLOR KEY YELLOW  
NAVIGATION  
ED  
F2  
FWD FRAME  
MODE LOCK  
L1 Y/C INPUT SELECT  
HDD Deck only  
B8  
B8 : Input/Output Selection  
1st Byte 2nd Byte  
External input selection L-1 VIDEO  
30  
31  
39  
34  
External input selection L-1 S-VIDEO 30  
External input selection DV  
30  
B8 : Recording Mode Selection  
1st Byte 2nd Byte  
XP 34  
SP 34  
LP 34  
EP 34  
DR 34  
AF 34  
AN 34  
AL 34  
AE 34  
30  
31  
32  
33  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
87  
Others  
Subtitle Selection  
B8 : Subtitle Selection  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
Byte  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
OFF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FJ  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
47  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
LO  
LT  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
76  
77  
SL  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
JAPANESE  
ENGLISH  
GERMAN  
FRENCH  
ITALIAN  
SPANISH  
DUTCH  
SWEDISH  
NORWEGIAN  
FINNISH  
DANISH  
AA  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
AB  
AF  
AM  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
TK  
TL  
AR  
AS  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
AY  
AZ  
IE  
BA  
IK  
PS  
PT  
BE  
IS  
BG  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SI  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZH  
ZU  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
SK  
“Language Code List” (A page 94)  
88  
Others  
Audio Language Selection  
B8 : Audio Language Selection  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
JAPANESE  
ENGLISH  
GERMAN  
FRENCH  
ITALIAN  
SPANISH  
DUTCH  
SWEDISH  
NORWEGIAN  
FINNISH  
DANISH  
AA  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FJ  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
47  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
LT  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
76  
77  
78  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
AB  
AF  
AM  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
TK  
TL  
AR  
AS  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
AY  
AZ  
IE  
BA  
IK  
PS  
PT  
BE  
IS  
BG  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SI  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZH  
ZU  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
SK  
SL  
EL  
“Language Code List” (A page 94)  
89  
Others  
Response Commands  
Commands relating to RS-232C control system.  
Command  
Description  
01  
02  
Complete: Issued by the external recorder upon completing all specified operations by commands.  
Error: Issued by the external recorder when receiving invalid commands in the context. In such cases,  
commands that are sent will not be accepted. However, a return command will be issued but only to the Status  
Sense. To clear the Error status, perform command 56 (Clear).  
05  
Not Target: Issued by the external recorder when specified operations by commands cannot be completed  
properly.  
0A  
0B  
03  
ACK: A return command issued when a defined command is received.  
NAK: A return command issued when an undefined or possibly nonexistent command is received.  
Cassette Out: Issued upon completing the operation of opening and closing the tray when the HDD/DVD deck  
is selected.  
System Commands  
Commands for acquiring information such as deck status.  
Command  
Description  
60  
61  
B9  
Chapter Sense: For acquiring the current chapter number. (*)  
Title/Track Sense: For acquiring the current title number under “ORIGINAL” or in the “PLAY LIST”. (*)  
Select Sense: For acquiring the status of the inputs, outputs, recording mode, audio language selection and  
subtitle selection. (*)  
BE  
BF  
D7  
D8  
Date Sense: For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day. (*)  
Time Sense: For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second. (*)  
Status Sense: For acquiring the deck information. (*)  
TC Data Sense: For acquiring the total remaining time in the current recording mode when there is a media in  
the selected deck. (*)  
D9  
DD  
FB  
CTL Data Sense: For acquiring the lapse counter when there is a media in the selected deck. (*)  
JVC Status Sense: Returns data from the unit. (*)  
VTR Ind: A command for checking whether the connected device is the external recorder.  
(*) : See A pages 90-93 for data format.  
Sense  
v
Chapter Sense  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte  
Chapter Sense Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
60  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (012)  
30  
31  
32  
E.g. : When the current chapter is the 12th chapter.  
90  
Others  
v
Title/Track Sense under “ORIGINAL”  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte  
Title/Track Sense (ORIGINAL) 30  
Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
61  
30  
30  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (345)  
33  
34  
35  
E.g. : When the current title under “ORIGINAL” is the 345th title.  
v
Title/Track Sense in “PLAY LIST”  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte  
Title/Track Sense (PLAY LIST) 38  
Hundreds Tens  
Ones  
3*  
61  
38  
38  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (028)  
30  
32  
38  
E.g. : When the current title under “PLAY LIST” is the 28th title.  
v
Select Sense  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
Select Sense  
B9  
External input  
selection  
Output selection Recording mode  
selection  
Audio language  
selection  
Subtitle selection  
3*  
3*  
**  
**  
**  
E.g. (3930311213) 39  
30  
31  
12  
13  
E.g. : When the selection status of the video deck is as follows:  
External input selection h L-1 S-VIDEO  
Output selection h Common output (Frame is fixed at 0.)  
Recording mode selection h SP  
Audio language selection h ENGLISH  
Subtitle selection h GERMAN  
For response data for B9, see data format for “B8 (Select Preset)” (A page 87-89).  
When the current status cannot be acquired, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).  
v
Date Data Sense  
For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day in ASCII codes.  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte 6th Byte  
Date Sense  
BE  
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day (Ones) Yr (Tens) Yr (Ones)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (09.14.2009) 30  
39  
31  
34  
30  
39  
When the current date is not set, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).  
v
Time Data Sense  
For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second in ASCII codes.  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Time Sense  
BF  
Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (12:34:56) 31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
When the current time is not set, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).  
91  
Others  
v
Status Data Sense  
For acquiring the remaining time in the current recording mode in hours, minutes and seconds for HDD/DVD.  
D7  
1byte  
1byte  
1byte  
2byte  
3byte  
4byte  
5byte  
STATUS  
SENSE  
HDD  
BD  
SD  
HDD/BD/SD  
Video EE  
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD  
bit7  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During PLAY During PAUSE (Set  
to 1 simultaneously  
with “During PLAY”  
in STILL mode.)  
bit6  
bit5  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
Audio EE  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During Reverse  
Shuttle Search  
(Excluding STILL)  
bit4  
bit3  
Record  
Forbidden  
Record  
Forbidden  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During  
STOP  
During Forward  
Shuttle Search  
(Excluding STILL)  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Occurrence of 0 (Fixed)  
abnormality in  
VTR  
During  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
STANDBY  
(Unit Power  
Off)  
bit2  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During  
Repeat  
Playback  
(Including  
PAUSE)  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
bit1  
bit0  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During REC  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
RS-232C  
command  
RS-232C  
command  
RS-232C  
command  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
error status. error status. error status.  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
v
TC Data Sense  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
7th Byte  
8th Byte  
TC Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)  
D8  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (01:23:45) 30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
30  
30  
E.g. : When remaining time is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.  
Frame is fixed as 0.  
92  
Others  
v
SEARCH SPEED  
bit3  
bit2  
bit1  
bit0  
STILL  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
x1  
0
0
0
0
0
1
SEARCH1  
SEARCH2  
SEARCH3  
SEARCH4  
SEARCH5  
v
CTL Data Sense  
For acquiring lapse counter of selected deck in hours, minutes and seconds.  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte  
CTL Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)  
6th Byte  
7th Byte  
8th Byte  
D9  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (01:23:45)  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
30  
30  
E.g. : When time lapse counter is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.  
Frame is fixed as 0.  
v
JVC Status Sense  
1byte  
2byte  
3byte  
4byte  
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD  
HDD/BD/SD  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
HDD/BD/SD  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
bit7 1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
bit6 0 (Fixed)  
bit5 0 (Fixed)  
bit4 0 (Fixed)  
bit3 0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
During dubbing (Including  
PAUSE)  
bit2 0 (Fixed)  
bit1 0 (Fixed)  
bit0 1 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. During dubbing (Including  
PAUSE)  
v
DISC TYPE  
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0  
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0  
DVD  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
CD  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
BD-ROM  
BD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
BD-RE  
No disc  
Unknown  
When SD deck is selected, the values are fixed as bit3:0, bit2:0, bit1:1 and bit0:0.  
93  
Others  
Language Code List  
Code  
AA  
Language  
Code  
HI  
Language  
Code  
OS  
PA  
FA  
Language  
Afar  
Hindi  
Ossetian  
Panjabi  
Persian  
Pali  
AB  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Akan  
HO  
HU  
IG  
Hiri Motu  
Hungarian  
Igbo  
AF  
AK  
PI  
SQ  
AM  
AR  
AN  
HY  
AS  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
IS  
Icelandic  
Ido  
PL  
Polish  
IO  
PT  
Portuguese  
Pashto  
II  
Sichuan Yi  
Inuktitut  
Interlingue  
PS  
QU  
RM  
RO  
Aragonese  
Armenian  
Assamese  
IU  
Quechua  
IE  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
IA  
Interlingua (International  
Auxiliary language Association)  
AV  
AE  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BM  
EU  
BE  
BN  
BH  
BI  
Avar  
ID  
IK  
Indonesian  
Inupiak  
RN  
RU  
SG  
SA  
SR  
HR  
SI  
Kirundi  
Avestan  
Aymara  
Russian  
Sango  
IT  
Italian  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
JV  
JA  
KL  
KN  
KS  
KR  
KK  
KM  
KI  
Javanese  
Japanese  
Kalaallisut  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kanuri  
Sanskrit  
Serbia  
Bambara  
Basque  
Croatian  
Sinhala  
Slovak  
Belarusian  
Bengali  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Northern Sami  
Samoan  
Shona  
Bihari  
Kazakh  
SE  
SM  
SN  
SD  
SO  
ST  
ES  
SC  
SS  
SU  
SW  
SV  
TY  
TA  
TT  
Bislama  
Bosnian  
Breton  
Khmer  
BS  
BR  
BG  
MY  
CA  
CH  
CE  
ZH  
CU  
CV  
KW  
CO  
CR  
CS  
DA  
Kikuyu  
RW  
KY  
KV  
KG  
KO  
KJ  
KU  
LO  
LA  
LV  
LI  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Sindhi  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Catalan, Valencian  
Chamorro  
Chechen  
Chinese  
Church Slavic  
Chuvash  
Cornish  
Somali  
Komi  
Southern Sotho  
Spanish  
Sardinian  
Swati  
Kongo  
Korean  
Kwanyama  
Kurukh  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Lao  
Latin  
Swedish  
Tahitian  
Tamil  
Latvian  
Corsican  
Cree  
Limburgish  
Lingala  
LN  
LT  
LB  
Tatar  
Czech  
Lithuanian  
Luxembourgish  
TE  
TG  
Telugu  
Danish  
Tajik  
94  
Others  
DV  
NL  
DZ  
EN  
EO  
ET  
EE  
FO  
FJ  
Divehi  
LU  
LG  
MK  
MH  
ML  
MI  
Luba-Katanga  
Ganda  
TL  
TH  
BO  
TI  
Tagalog  
Thai  
Dutch  
Dzongkha  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Ewe  
Macedonian  
Marshallese  
Malayalam  
Māori  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tongan  
Tswana  
Tsonga  
Turkmen  
Turkish  
Twi  
TO  
TN  
TS  
TK  
TR  
TW  
UG  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VE  
VI  
MR  
MS  
MG  
MT  
MO  
MN  
NA  
NV  
NR  
ND  
NG  
NE  
NN  
NB  
NO  
NY  
OC  
OJ  
Marathi  
Faroese  
Fijian  
Malay  
Malagasy  
Maltese  
FI  
Finnish  
French  
FR  
FY  
FF  
KA  
DE  
GD  
GA  
GL  
GV  
EL  
GN  
GU  
HT  
HA  
HE  
HZ  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauruan  
Uighur  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Western Frisian  
Fulah  
Georgian  
German  
Scottish Gaelic  
Irish  
Navajo  
Uzbek  
South Ndebele  
North Ndebele  
Ndonga  
Venda  
Vietnamese  
Volapük  
Welsh  
VO  
CY  
WA  
WO  
XH  
YI  
Galician  
Manx  
Nepali  
Norwegian Nynorsk  
Norwegian Bokmål  
Norwegian  
Chichewa  
Occitan  
Walloon  
Wolof  
Greek  
Guaraní  
Gujarati  
Haitian  
Xhosa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zhuang  
Zulu  
YO  
ZA  
ZU  
Hausa  
Ojibwa  
Hebrew  
Herero  
OR  
OM  
Oriya  
Oromo  
95  
Others  
Country Code List  
Code  
AD  
AE  
AF  
Country Name  
Code  
GM  
GN  
Country Name  
Code  
NU  
NZ  
Country Name  
Andorra  
Gambia  
Guinea  
Niue  
United Arab Emirates  
Afghanistan  
New Zealand  
Oman  
GP  
Guadeloupe  
Equatorial Guinea  
Greece  
OM  
PA  
AG  
AI  
Antigua and Barbuda  
Anguilla  
GQ  
GR  
Panama  
Peru  
PE  
AL  
Albania  
GS  
South Georgia and South Sandwich  
Islands  
PF  
Polynesia  
AM  
AN  
AO  
AQ  
AR  
AS  
AT  
AU  
AW  
AZ  
BA  
BB  
BD  
BE  
BF  
BG  
BH  
BI  
Armenia  
GT  
GU  
GW  
GY  
HK  
HM  
HN  
HR  
HT  
HU  
ID  
Guatemala  
PG  
PH  
PK  
PL  
Papua New Guinea  
Philippines  
Netherlands Antilles  
Angola  
Guam  
Guinea-Bissau  
Pakistan  
Antarctica  
Argentina  
American Samoa  
Austria  
Guyana  
Poland  
Hong Kong  
PM  
PN  
PR  
PT  
PW  
PY  
QA  
RE  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SB  
SC  
SD  
SE  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Saint Pierre and Miquelon  
Pitcairn Islands  
Puerto Rico  
Portugal  
Heard and McDonald Islands  
Honduras  
Australia  
Croatia  
Aruba  
Haiti  
Palau  
Azerbaijan  
Bosnia and Herzegovina  
Barbados  
Bangladesh  
Belgium  
Hungary  
Paraguay  
Indonesia  
Qatar  
IE  
Ireland  
Reunon Island  
Romania  
IL  
Israel  
IN  
India  
Russian Federation  
Rwanda  
Burkina Faso  
Bulgaria  
IO  
British Indian Ocean Territory  
IQ  
Iraq  
Saudi Arabia  
Solomon Islands  
Seychelles  
Bahrain  
IR  
Iran  
Burundi  
IS  
Iceland  
BJ  
Benin  
IT  
Italy  
Sudan  
BM  
BN  
BO  
BR  
BS  
BT  
BV  
BW  
BY  
BZ  
Bermuda  
Brunei  
JM  
JO  
JP  
KE  
KG  
KH  
KI  
Jamaica  
Jordan  
Sweden  
Singapore  
Bolivia  
Japan  
Saint Helena  
Slovenia  
Brazil  
Kenya  
Bahamas  
Bhutan  
Kyrgyzstan  
Cambodia  
Kiribati  
SJ  
Svalbard and Jan Mayen Islands  
Slovakia  
SK  
SL  
Bouvet Island  
Botswana  
Belarus  
Sierra Leone  
San Marino  
Senegal  
KM  
KN  
KP  
Comoros  
Saint Kitts and Nevis  
SM  
SN  
Belize  
Korea, Democratic People's Republic SO  
of  
Somalia  
CA  
CC  
CF  
CG  
CH  
CI  
Canada  
KR  
KW  
KY  
KZ  
LA  
LB  
Korea, Republic of  
Kuwait  
SR  
ST  
SV  
SY  
SZ  
TC  
Suriname  
Cocos Islands  
Central African Republic  
Congo, Republic of  
Switzerland  
Sao Tome and Principe  
El Salvador  
Cayman Islands  
Kazakhstan  
Laos  
Syria  
Swaziland  
Cote d'Ivoire  
Lebanon  
Turks and Caicos Islands  
96  
Others  
CK  
CL  
CM  
CN  
CO  
CR  
CU  
CV  
CX  
CY  
CZ  
DE  
DJ  
Cook Islands  
Chile  
LC  
Saint Lucia  
Liechtenstein  
Sri Lanka  
Liberia  
TD  
TF  
Chad  
LI  
French Southern Territories  
Togo  
Cameroon  
LK  
TG  
TH  
TJ  
China  
LR  
Thailand  
Colombia  
LS  
Lesotho  
Tajikistan  
Costa Rica  
Cuba  
LT  
Lithuania  
Luxembourg  
Latvia  
TK  
TM  
TN  
TO  
TP  
TR  
TT  
Tokelau  
LU  
Turkmenistan  
Tunisia  
Cape Verde  
Christmas Island  
Cyprus  
LV  
LY  
Libya  
Tonga  
MA  
MC  
MD  
MG  
MH  
ML  
MM  
MN  
MO  
MP  
MQ  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MU  
MV  
MW  
MX  
MY  
MZ  
NA  
NC  
NE  
NF  
Morocco  
East Timor  
Czech Republic  
Germany  
Monaco  
Turkey  
Moldova  
Trinidad and Tobago  
Tuvalu  
Djibouti  
Madagascar  
Marshall Islands  
Mali  
TV  
TW  
TZ  
DK  
DM  
DO  
DZ  
EC  
EE  
EG  
EH  
ER  
ES  
ET  
FI  
Denmark  
Taiwan  
Dominica, Commonwealth of  
Dominican Republic  
Algeria  
Tanzania  
Myanmar  
Mongolia  
Macau  
UA  
UG  
UM  
US  
UY  
UZ  
VA  
VC  
VE  
VG  
VI  
Ukraine  
Uganda  
Ecuador  
Minor Outlying Islands  
United States  
Uruguay  
Estonia  
Northern Mariana Islands  
Martinique  
Mauritania  
Montserrat  
Malta  
Egypt  
Western Sahara  
Eritrea  
Uzbekistan  
Vatican  
Spain  
Saint Vincent and the Grenadine  
Venezuela  
Ethiopia  
Mauritius  
Maldives  
Finland  
British Virgin Islands  
Virgin Islands of the United States  
Vietnam  
FJ  
Fiji  
Malawi  
FK  
FM  
FO  
FR  
FX  
GA  
GB  
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)  
Micronesia (Federated States of)  
Faroe Islands  
France  
Mexico  
VN  
VU  
WF  
WS  
YE  
YT  
YU  
Malaysia  
Vanuatu  
Mozambique  
Namibia  
Wallis and Futuna  
Samoa  
France, Metropolitan  
Gabon  
New Caledonia  
Niger  
Yemen  
Mayotte  
United Kingdom of Great Britain and  
Northern Ireland  
Norfolk Island  
Yugoslavia  
GD  
GE  
GF  
GH  
GI  
Grenada  
Georgia  
NG  
NI  
Nigeria  
ZA  
ZM  
ZR  
ZW  
South Africa  
Zambia  
Nicaragua  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Nepal  
French Guiana  
Ghana  
NL  
NO  
NP  
NR  
Zaire  
Zimbabwe  
Gibraltar  
GL  
Greenland  
Nauru  
97  
Others  
Using the HDMI Consumer  
Electronics Control (HDMI  
CEC)  
Creating a Seamless BD  
When titles are imported into the HDD in the HD quality from  
a video camera, or when edited titles (e.g., after applying  
scene delete) are dubbed to a disc, seamless playback may  
not be possible at the joints of scenes. In this case, perform  
dubbing after executing “SEAMLESS” under the “MODE  
CHANGE” setting menu.  
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
By using a HDMI cable to connect this unit with a TV that  
For details, refer to “Mode conversion” (A page 73) .  
v
supports the HDMI CEC standard, this unit and the TV can  
be linked and operated together.  
Creating a seamless BD that uses “MODE  
CONVERSION” (seamless conversion,  
recording mode conversion)  
v
HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) is an industrial  
standard that allows HDMI devices to be linked and  
operated among each other by connecting them with a  
HDMI cable.  
m
Procedures to create a seamless BDMV  
File to import  
If you do not want to  
perform scene delete/  
chapter delete  
If you want to  
perform scene  
delete/chapter  
delete  
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
operations  
v
Perform the following operations when this unit is turned  
AVCHD  
MOV*  
Recording mode  
conversion  
Seamless conversion  
on, and the TV will switch automatically to the HDMI input  
that this unit is connected to.  
v
Playback from HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD  
Conversion not required Seamless conversion  
v
Press the [NAVIGATION] or [SETUP] button  
SD-VIDEO(HD)* Recording mode  
HDV  
Recording mode  
conversion after  
seamless conversion  
v
Turning off the power for the TV will also turn the power off  
for this unit automatically.  
If HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD is being used for dubbing,  
the power will be turned off after dubbing finishes.  
conversion after  
seamless conversion  
SD-VIDEO(HD)* : SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)  
MOV*  
:
MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the  
JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
Using HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
(activating the function)  
m
Procedures to create a seamless BDAV  
1
Connect this unit to a TV that is HDMI CEC  
compatible using a HDMI cable  
File to import  
If you do not want to  
perform scene delete/  
chapter delete  
If you want to  
perform scene  
delete/chapter  
delete  
2
Change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “ON”.  
Check the monitor (TV) setting if the HDMI CEC function  
does not work.  
v
AVCHD  
MOV*  
Conversion not required Seamless  
conversion  
Memo:  
v
If you are not using the HDMI CEC function (deactivating),  
change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “OFF”.  
Conversion not required Seamless  
conversion  
Note:  
v
The HDMI CEC function cannot be used if a TV that is not  
SD-VIDEO(HD)* Seamless conversion  
HDV  
Seamless  
conversion  
compatible with HDMI CEC has been connected.  
v
If a HDMI cable is not used for connecting, the HDMI CEC  
function will not be usable.  
SD-VIDEO(HD)* : SD-VIDEO(JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)  
MOV*  
:
MOV files that are taken in SP mode using the  
JVC ProHD Camcorder GY-HM700/100  
Memo:  
v
During dubbing to BDMV, the recording mode cannot be  
specified.  
v
v
v
v
Do not perform recording mode conversion before  
seamless conversion. Otherwise, seamless conversion  
cannot be performed.  
If scene delete or chapter delete is applied to a title, it  
cannot be dubbed to a BDMV disc without performing  
seamless conversion.  
For titles that use the H.264/AVC video compression format  
such as AVCHD, titles using B-frames as reference for B-  
frames (pyramidal reference format) are not supported.  
For titles that are imported into the HDD in the SD picture  
quality, you can create a seamless DVD by setting  
“SEAMLESS PLAYBACK” under the “Setting Menu List” to  
“ON”, followed by performing re-encode dubbing.  
Refer to “SEAMLESS PLAYBACK” (A page 77) .  
98  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Symptom  
Action  
Reference  
Page  
Power does not turn on The “HELLO” message remains  
up.  
Press the [RESET] button on the front  
displayed, and the unit does not start panel.  
(A page 13)  
If it does not start up, stop using this unit,  
unplug the plug from the power point, and  
bring it to the dealer or “Service Center”.  
“FAN LOCKED” is  
displayed on the display  
window of this unit  
The cooling fan motor is not working. The cooling fan motor is spoiled. Remove  
the power plug from the power point, and  
consult the dealer from which this product  
is purchased, or any nearby JVC Servicing  
Center.  
-
Power turns off  
automatically  
The “AUTO POWER (OFF)” setting is Change the “AUTO POWER (OFF)”  
(A page 75)  
set to “2 HOURS” or “6 HOURS”.  
setting of “SETUP” to “OFF”.  
The temperature of this unit has rose, Place this unit in an area with ventilation if  
-
and operation has ceased for safety  
purposes.  
possible, and wait approximately 30  
minutes for it to cool down.  
The power turns on  
automatically  
The “HDMI-CEC” setting is set to  
“ON”.  
Change the “HDMI-CEC” setting of  
“CONNECTION” to “OFF”.  
(A page 81)  
(A page 37)  
(A page 81)  
Input cannot be  
switched  
i.LINK connection is currently being  
established.  
Cancel importing, or wait until the  
connection ends.  
There are no video  
images on the monitor  
Monitor only supports RGB input.  
Set “HDMI --> DVI COLOR” in the setting  
menu to “RGB FIX”.  
“HDCP ERROR” is displayed.  
Use a monitor that supports HDCP.  
-
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the  
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value  
(A page 80)  
(TV) is connected to this unit using a  
HDMI cable, or when the screen  
resolution is set to “1080p”.  
other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find  
it annoying.  
Screen is distorted  
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the  
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value  
(A page 24)  
(TV) is connected to this unit using a  
HDMI cable, or when the screen  
resolution is set to “1080p”.  
other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find  
it annoying.  
There is no audio sound The “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT” setting  
is set to “OFF”.  
Change the “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT”  
setting of “CONNECTION” to “ON”.  
(A page 81)  
(A page 78)  
(A page 23)  
The amplifier does not support  
“BITSTREAM” output.  
Use an amplifier that supports bitstream  
output.  
Dubbing cannot be  
performed  
The title to be dubbed is copyright  
protected.  
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot  
be dubbed. Select a title that is not  
copyright-protected.  
A finalized disc has been inserted.  
The disc is not formatted.  
Insert a disc that has not been finalized.  
Format the disc.  
-
(A page 25)  
The SD card is write-protected.  
Remove the SD card and remove the write (A page 27)  
protect lock.  
High-speed dubbing  
Dubbing cannot be performed and  
Set “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” in the  
(A page 24)  
cannot be performed for “SOME TITLES CANNOT BE  
EP mode titles  
settings menu to “4:3” before recording or  
DUBBED” is displayed when trying to importing in the EP mode.  
(A page 77)  
perform high-speed dubbing of a EP  
mode title to a DVD-VIDEO mode  
disc.  
99  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
(Continued)  
Problem  
Symptom  
Action  
Reference  
Page  
Data cannot be  
imported  
The title to be dubbed is copyright  
protected.  
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot  
be dubbed. Select a title that is not  
copyright-protected.  
(A page 23)  
The number of titles stored in the HDD Delete or combine the titles in the HDD to  
(A page 62)  
has reached the maximum amount.  
reduce the amount of titles to less than  
500.  
The remaining space on the HDD is  
running out.  
Delete the titles in the HDD to increase the (A page 62)  
remaining space.  
The title/group name  
cannot be changed  
Protection of the title/group name is  
turned on.  
Turn protection off for the title/group name. (A page 64)  
The remote control  
unit does not work  
The battery of the remote control unit  
has run out.  
Change new batteries for the remote  
control.  
(A page 16)  
The remote control code of this unit  
and the remote control unit are  
different from each other.  
Change the “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” (A page 16)  
for the remote control to the same number  
used by this unit.  
A “LOCKED” message appears on the Disable the “mode lock” setting.  
display window of the unit.  
(A page 82)  
(A page 82)  
-
The disc cannot be  
ejected  
A “LOCKED” message appears on the Disable the “tray lock” setting.  
display window of the unit.  
The “READING” message does not  
disappear from the unit's display  
window, and the disc tray does not  
Pressing the [ M ] button at the front of the  
unit for five seconds or longer opens the  
disc tray. To close the disc tray after  
open when the [ M ] button is pressed. removing the disc, press the [ A ] button,  
and wait until the tray is closed and power  
is turned off.  
(If the disc tray does not open after  
pressing the [ M ] button for five seconds  
or longer, consult our authorized dealer.)  
The disc cannot be  
played  
A disc that cannot be played on this  
unit is inserted.  
Confirm that the disc is playable on this  
unit.  
(A page 10)  
The region code of the BD or DVD is  
different from that of this unit.  
Confirm that the region number is playable (A page 10)  
on this unit.  
An unfinalized DVD disc that is  
recorded using another device is  
inserted.  
Use that device to finalize the disc.  
-
-
Output is at 480i  
regardless of the  
component output  
resolution setting  
The component output setting may be  
changed to 480i after viewing at a  
setting of 1080/24p using a HDMI  
connection.  
Turn the power off, and turn it on again.  
The aspect ratios of  
the HDMI output and  
component output are component output terminals of this  
When two monitors are connected  
respectively to the HDMI output and  
When two monitors are connected  
simultaneously, users are recommended  
to set “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to  
“COMPONENT”.  
(A page 80)  
different  
unit, the screen aspect ratio of the  
component output may not be  
appropriate if “VIDEO PRIORITY  
MODE” is set to “HDMI”.  
100  
Others  
Digital audio output:  
Specifications  
General  
Power requirement  
AC 120 V H, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
Optical  
: PCM, AAC, Dolby Digital and DTS  
HDMI output  
19-pin type A  
(Deep Color, x.v.Color, Ver1.3)  
USB terminal  
USB2.0  
m
Power on  
Power off  
: 34 W  
: 3.0 W  
m
SD memory card  
SD, SDHC  
Laser specification  
For CD  
m
HDD Deck  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 779 nm to 789 nm  
SR-HD1500US : 500 GB  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
SR-HD1250US : 250 GB  
Recording compression system  
Video  
MPEG2 (VBR)  
H.264/AVC  
Audio  
For DVD  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 656 nm to 663 nm  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)  
For BD  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 400 nm to 410 nm  
m
BD/DVD Deck  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
Recording compression system  
Video  
Temperature  
Operating  
Storage  
MPEG2 (CBR/VBR)  
H.264/AVC  
Audio  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)  
Region code  
: 5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)  
: -20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)  
Operating  
position  
: Horizontal only  
Dimensions  
(W x H x D)  
: 435 mm x 70 mm x 351 mm  
(17-1/10" x 2-6/8" x 13-13/16")  
BD  
: Region A  
: #1  
DVD  
Weight  
m
ACCESSORIES  
SR-HD1500US : 5.1 kg (11.2 lbs)  
Provided accessories  
SR-HD1250US : 5.0 kg (11.0 lbs)  
v
AC power cord  
m
Input/Output  
v
Audio/Video cable  
Video input  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K (BNC)  
v
BNC male to RCA female adapter  
Video output  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K (BNC)  
v
Infrared remote control unit  
Audio input  
: Max 2 Vrms / 10 kK (pin jack)  
: 2 Vrms / 10 kK terminated (pin jack)  
v
“AA” battery x 2  
Audio output  
v
CD-ROM  
S-video input  
Y
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
C
: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 K  
S-video output  
Y
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
C
: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 K  
: 4-pin for HDV/DV IN  
DV  
Remote Input  
:
φ3.5 mm Jack  
Serial Command: D-SUB 9-PIN  
Component video output:  
Y
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
CB/CR, PB/PR : 0.7 Vp-p, 75 K  
Memo:  
v
Corresponding to copy protection  
101  
Others  
MPEG2 ........................................................................ 9  
Index  
O
ON SCREEN ....................................................... 12, 79  
OPTICAL ....................................................... 14, 18, 78  
OSD LANGUAGE ..................................................... 79  
A
AUDIO CABLE .............................................. 14, 18, 17  
AUDIO LANGUAGE ...................................... 56, 76, 89  
AUDIO/SUBTITLE SETTINGS .................................. 56  
P
PICTURE QUALITY ................................ 23, 28, 40, 57  
PLAYBACK NAVIGATION ............................ 15, 43, 48  
PLAYBACK SETTINGS .......................... 16, 52, 56, 76  
PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT ........................................ 57  
B
BD (BD-R/BD-RE) ......................... 9, 10, 25, 39, 58, 93  
BD MIX SOUND ........................................................ 79  
BD VIDEO DATA ........................................................ 8  
BDAV .............................................................. 9, 10, 24  
BDMV .............................................................. 9, 10, 24  
BD-ROM ........................................................ 10, 56, 93  
BD-VIDEO RATINGS ................................................ 76  
BLUE BACK .............................................................. 79  
R
RECORDING MODE ...... 13, 15, 23, 24, 28, 47, 50, 87  
REGION CODE ......................................................... 10  
REMOTE CONTROL ........................ 13, 14, 15, 16, 82  
REMOTE CONTROL CODE ............................... 16, 75  
RESUME POINT ..................................... 51, 53, 54, 77  
RS-232C ....................................................... 14, 19, 83  
C
CHANGE ANGLE ...................................................... 56  
CHANGE AUDIO OUTPUT ....................................... 56  
CHANGE CHAPTER ................................................. 56  
CHAPTER EDIT .................................................. 50, 67  
CHAPTER MARK .................................... 16, 51, 67, 68  
COMPONENT OUTPUT ........................................... 81  
COMPONENT VIDEO CABLE ............................ 14, 17  
CONNECTION ........................................ 17, 18, 19, 80  
COUNTRY CODE LIST ...................................... 76, 96  
S
SCREEN SAVER ...................................................... 79  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK ........................................... 77  
SETTING THE DATE/TIME ...................................... 20  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE ...................................... 56, 76  
S-VIDEO ................................................. 14, 17, 18, 81  
T
TIME DISPLAY STYLE ....................................... 22, 75  
D
U
DATE DISPLAY STYLE ...................................... 21, 75  
DETAIL SETTING ..................................................... 57  
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION .................................. 57  
DIMMER (POWER ON) ............................................ 75  
DISPLAY WINDOW ................................ 13, 14, 75, 82  
Dolby Digital ........................................................ 77, 78  
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD ........................................ 78  
DTS ..................................................................... 10, 78  
DTS-HD ..................................................................... 79  
DUAL DISC ............................................................... 11  
DVD (DVD-R/DVD-RW)  
USB ................................................... 13, 18, 23, 29, 33  
V
VIDEO CABLE .................................................... 14, 17  
VIDEO MODE ................................................. 9, 10, 77  
VIDEO INPUT SETTING ........................................... 81  
VIDEO SETTINGS .................................................... 57  
VR MODE ............................................................. 9, 10  
...................... 9, 10, 23, 25, 30, 39, 46, 53, 58, 72, 93  
DVD VIDEO ...................................... 10, 24, 30, 32, 76  
F
FINALIZE ................................................ 10, 41, 44, 58  
H
HDMI ............................................................. 14, 80, 81  
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT ............................................. 81  
HDMI CABLE ................................................ 14, 17, 98  
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION ................................. 80  
HDMI-CEC .......................................................... 81, 98  
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING .................. 10, 23, 24, 39, 77  
I
i.LINK ................................................ 13, 18, 23, 29, 37  
J
JPEG ..................................... 24, 29, 30, 33, 35, 42, 55  
L
LANGUAGE CODE ............................................. 76, 94  
LOCKING THE DISC TRAY ...................................... 82  
M
MENU LANGUAGE ................................................... 76  
MODE LOCK ............................................................. 82  
102  
103  
Printed in Thailand  
1010MTH-SW-MT  
Q2010 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  

RCA SOLAM VIDEO CAMERA User Manual
QSC Audio MH 1063 User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio PA 305 User Manual
Power Acoustik CPT1 1500 User Manual
Philips AQ 6601 User Manual
Pelco Camera Accessories SS8006 26 User Manual
Panasonic Palmcorder PV DV351 User Manual
Olympus 227620 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System KDC 3051R User Manual
JVC JCV Everio High Definition Digital Camcorder GZE10RUS User Manual